Home

Chrysler 2005 300 Automobile User Manual

1. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 Cavity Fuse Circuits 40 5 Amp Power Mirror Orange A1 10 Amp Climate Control Module Red Headlamp Leveling if equipped Rear Park Assist if equipped Tire Pressure Monitoring if equipped 42 30 Amp Automatic Temperature Con Pink trol ATC Blower Motor 43 30 Amp Rear Defroster Pink 44 20 Amp Audio Amplifier Lt Blue VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lights W5W Rear Compartment Trunk Light 579 Overhead Console Reading Lights 578 Visor Vanity Lights A6220 Glove Box Light 194 Door Courtesy 22 444 eb x EE A 562 Shift Indicator Light JKLE14140 NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for re placement instruct
2. RES 228 236 SeltSealing sdr cea EIER Re Ree 243 OIZeS iG 3 x BH RS a PIERS sb ARR 229 SHOW TES onsite eumd dotes 249 Spare Dite 424 RE 268 SPINNING aes hse do E RE Rad E d 240 Tread Wear Indicators 241 Torque Converter Clutch 212 TOWING x24 Che Rede RERO 259 Disabled Vehicle 278 Recreational 2413 mao pr mae Goa ase os 261 Trailering sisari Hind ae Gea He 259 Traction Control 44 V vus Reyes 110 Traction Control Switch Ls 110 Trailer Towing maui 259 Minimum Requirements 259 Trailer and Tongue Weight 259 Transaxle Dace be al Re ERR 310 Automate L9 eni G dta 310 Autostick 54025 44484 EE EX 222 Selection of Lubricant 334 Transmission Automatic se xx xor 209 214 Shifting i i x Rr Rx RE RE 209 Transmission Ln See Transaxle Transmitter Battery Service 23 Transmitter Garage Door Opener 119 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry 20 Transporting Pets sse esas eR sg 57 Tread Wear Indicators 241 Trip Odometer Reset Button 144 Trunk Release Emergency 29 Trunk Release Remote Control 28 Turn Signals eer emu Ere ded 105
3. 15 Doorlocks 4 ati iira 15 Manual Door Locks 15 Power Door Locks 16 Child Protection Door Lock 19 Remote Keyless 20 To Unlock The Doors 21 To Lock The Doors 21 To Unlock The Tunk R ks 22 Using The Panic Alarm 22 General Information 23 Transmitter Battery Service 23 ll Vehicle Theft Alarm If Equipped 24 a Windows 25 Power Windows eee 25 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Wi Trunk Lock And Release 28 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Trunk Safety Warning 28 sake hye 7 Trunk Emergency Release 29 H Engine Break In Recommendations 57 Bl Occupant Restraints 29 x E 30 AGS RON Ad cant ii Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The PretensiOers v ex eor Se dos 34 Vehicle yd aa kaia 58 en ie Driver Sea Belt Reminder oyster 35 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Veludle ess seis 59 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
4. 103 Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights 42 2622 mede oma ala abs 103 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 104 Headlamps On With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 104 Daytime Running Lights Canada Only 104 Lights On Reminder keen 104 Headlight Time Delay 104 Fog Lights If Equipped 105 Tam Seals 105 Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch 106 Flash To Pass 2a kp ane ena 106 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63 E Windshield Wipers And Washers 100 W Electronic Speed 1 115 Windshield Washers 106 AClVal pre RE he 116 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 107 To Set At A Desired Speed 116 Mist Feature 6 6 0 0 107 To Deactivate Headlamps On With Wipers To Resume Speed 116 Available With Auto Headlights Only 107 To Vary The Speed Setting 116 me To Accelerate For Passing 117 Intermittent Wiper System 108 ll Overhead Console If Equipped 118 Adding Washer Fluid 108 Courtesy Reading 118 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 109 118
5. 58 253 303 Exhaust System sess ese hate esa Re 302 Exterior Folding Mirrors 66 Filters Cleaner nice sone Y wae ede ee es 295 Air Conditioning 203 300 Engine Puel ease od awa wea as 296 Engine Oil cese eom n 295 333 Engine Oil Disposal 294 Flashers Hazard Warning TumnSignal eee Flash To Pass RR Flat Tire Changing Bloor Console t pA Ee ERE YES Fluid Capacities Fluid Leaks 2 dee ens Fluid Level Checks Brake Power Steering Fog Lights Folding Rear Seat 366 INDEX Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 277 Buel i222 gedaan de ec Paw oe bas hy Se 250 Adding ex eoe m ete Bak aes 254 Additives 2 0 0 253 CICA uude is duras i pira Ret 251 Piller gx hts ERE ae eee on 254 Filter RS 296 Gasoline arbe eben RR e eg aes 250 Gauge cise de P dex RES eed ee 145 HOSES d xke kere gE mG ge xus LE E NEUE E 310 Octane Rating erede re es 250 333 Requirements saaria 250 332 Tank Capacity 332 Fueling RE E Red A 254 FUSES e RE En ORE SERRE Y Eb eres 315 Garage Door Opener 119 Gas E REPE 254 Gasoline i bs oak cod be d is vu 250 Gasoline Cl
6. Rhythm and Blues Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Music Religious Talk Religious Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SET DIR Button Radio Mode To SET The Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET DIR button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET DIR button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memor
7. 36 Seat Belt Extender 36 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with either side up 8125e0aa The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Ignition Key Removal The shift lever must be in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position then remove the key 80e54ed7 NOTE The power window switches radio power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable through the electronic vehicle information center EVIC if equipped Refer to Per sonal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Section for details 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger ous for a number of reasons child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thie
8. 232 Automatic Transmission General Bl Tires General Information 236 IBIDORAUOHL dues nad 2E Tire Pressure ak cow 236 EGU DDOR aee cis eat wanaties Pan Tire Inflation Pressures 237 AutoStick Operation 222 239 E Parking Brakes Yenc se 6h X Ue HERR RR 222 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 239 Ia Brake Syste au socer down E e Nas 224 Tire Spinning 240 206 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tread Wear Indicators 241 Sulfur In Gasoline 252 Replacement Tires 241 Materials Added To Fuel 253 Alignment And 242 Fuel System Cautions 253 li Self Sealing Tires If Equipped 243 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 253 ll Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped 243 Adding Fuel 0 000 004 254 Tire Pressure Monitoring Base System 243 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 254 Tire Pressure Monitoring a Vehicle Loading ews ER Or es 256 aac MEME ii Vehicle Certification Label 256 General Information 247 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR
9. 301 B Pillar Location ey Oe on oe oes 232 Brake Assist System 112 Brake Parking 222 Brake System sss ee ee ees 224 307 Ant LOCK uuu csv bu rp x 225 Fluid Check 2 n 309 334 HOSS sus s eb A a eo bes REESE RU RO 308 Warning Light 00000 142 Brake Transmission Interlock 221 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 57 Bulb Replacement 323 Bulbs Light sise Re e 322 Calibration Compass 151 Capacities Fluid csse e bh s 332 Caps Filler Fuel 265 eer kere se PEE 254 Radiator eR od ded edet oie 305 Car Washes eiis idea sid RR nthe 312 Carbon Monoxide Warning 253 Cargo Tie Downs teh p 131 Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance 192 Catalytic Converter 296 CD Player iex eee RET eds 159 164 175 Cellular Phone erre ies 68 Chains 2 2 rx edb GU CES Y eu 248 Changing Flat Tire 265 Chart Tire Sizing 229 Child Restraint 50 52 54 55 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 54 Child Safety Locks Clean Air Gasoline Climate Control isses e Clock m Rr mph Compact Disc Maintenance C
10. Corr ew ee 295 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 295 Fuel Catalytic Converter Maintenance Free 297 Air Conditioner Maintenance 299 Air Filter 300 Power Steering Fluid Check 300 Front amp Rear Suspension BallJoints 301 282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Steering Linkage 301 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 301 Body Lubrication 301 Windshield Wiper Blades 301 Windshield Washers 302 Exhaust System 302 Cooling System ics ses a Re Rs 303 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 307 ua ce ae RE Rer RP 307 Brake Fluid Level Check 309 Fuel System Hoses 310 Automatic Transmission 310 Front And Rear Wheel Bearings 311 Appearance Care And Protection From COFFOSIODE conor a EUR eU ee 311 Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders 300 315 Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders 300C 300 Touring 315 Bl Power Distribution Centers 315 Front Power Distribution Center 315 Rear Power Distribu
11. 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 189 Antitteeze Disposal eme ava hod a 306 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 304 305 332 Anti Lock Brake System 225 Anti Lock Warning Light 141 Anti Theft Security Alarm 24 Appearance a 311 Auto Down Power Windows 26 Auto Up Power Windows 26 Automatic Dimming Mirror 65 Automatic Door Locks 17 8 Automatic Headlights 104 Automatic Temperature Control 197 Automatic Transaxle 310 Adding Fluid 334 Selection Of Lubricant 334 Automatic Transmission 209 214 311 Adding 2 2 ee em a 311 Fluid and Filter Changes 311 Fluid Change 0000000000 311 Fluid Level Check 22 2020 esee 310 Gear Ranges i e ce o eee b oes 210 Torque Converter 212 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 213 Autostick e xe sce Race de 216 222 en INDEX 363 Ball Joints ize ER ene ee be des 301 Battery 2s POE ke ete hae sae 297 Jump Starting ies ise eee en 273 Keyless Transmitter Replacement 23 Location 93k x Foe oh E GE 274 298 Bearings seo esce m d EE eh dee EU 311 Belts Drive er SHE ea RES 295 Body Mechanism Lubrication
12. MOR Od OR REE 89 Rear Folding igor ca pcg ege 97 ise ego PEW AGS pe ede 90 Security Alarm s ee ee ee eee bees 24 Selection of Coolant s scd dista ci med es 333 Self Sealing Tires kc cereum Pe Bee he oe 243 Sentry Key 482000 s8G mese ee Pe varus 12 Service Assistance soso ek daa 352 Service Contract 24 osc aac Tarata nik 354 Service Engine Soon Light 146 Service Manuals 356 Setting the Clock 158 160 166 176 Settings Personal 2425 es koe ees 154 Shift Speeds icc suse ke ha 209 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 34 Side Airbag edd Ey d ER RS 43 Signals TUM hr e eR p EA 140 Slippery Surfaces Driving 276 Snow Chains use EY eR 248 Snow Tires Spare Tire Spark Plugs Speed Control incertae Creme 115 Speedometer kia 140 StartinB aac pes ea AEE aed ORE ee 207 372 INDEX ee Engine Fails to Start 208 Starting and Operating 207 Steering linkage oe bw kh eR aatia ens 301 Powel xy ESI ER E eR ES 227 300 Tle Column Re RET e 109 Wheel Tit 2 242 Ree e Ree att 109 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls icu erdum rey mU 190 OEOTape ga bed RR ee E 130 321 storage Vehicle s c Res 203 321 Storing Your Vehicle 321 Sulfur in Gasoline ss ses
13. 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and optional power sunroof switches 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is opened The lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push the finger depression on the overhead console to open Push the finger depression to close es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper ate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle s battery and charging system no batteries are needed NOTE The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is dis abled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active For ad
14. 232 370 INDEX Power Brakes me oie anata RESP VA Haale 224 Distribution Center 315 Door Locks mirsani 16 MirrO S oe hi Gees HO Re Vw os grs 67 Quitlet o soe 127 DEAS iei Read PASS eRe aded ed ds 89 Steering uc aea aem E RR ka ds 227 Steering Checking arre 300 Sunroof wira 124 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 109 Windows cR RR RR 25 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 36 Preparation for Jacking 266 Programmable Electronic Features 119 123 154 Programming Transmitters 119 123 Radial Ply Tires 239 Radiator Cap 305 Radio or Rete RE 159 164 175 Radio Broadcast Signals 191 Radio Operation 159 164 175 194 Radio Remote Controls 190 Radio Satellite 187 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 107 Rear 5eat Folding eoe mem 97 Rear Window Defroster 195 Rearview Mirrors 2 25 65 Reclining Front Seats 90 Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Pais ac Be ds iss doa lee DUE S 333 Recorder Event Data 48 Recreational Towing 261 Refrigera
15. 189 m AE 2 And WMA Play 185 lll Remote Sound System Controls 190 Satellite Radio If Equipped 187 KAO PEABO m System Activation 187 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification ce pays Number ENS SID lees eee 187 Satellite S Ces oer eta dut pe ERU 191 Selecting Satellite Mode In REF RAQ And RAK Radio General Information 191 e ae Radio Broadcast Signals 191 Selecting a Channel 188 Two Types Of Signals e 192 199 Electrical 192 up e CAN E i AM Reception 192 PTY Button 189 FM Reception 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee 192 PTY Button 189 ll Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance 192 136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME E CD DVD Disc Maintenance 193 Winter Operation 203 ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 194 Vacation Storage 203 NA Climate Controls siess cra RR RE RES 194 Window Fogging 203 Climate Controls Manual 194 Outside Air Intake 203 Automatic Temperature Control A C Air Filter If Equipped 203 Te BMDP vui eiecti ici qug Op
16. 257 aM Tire Chais s s eve RR XR Ra 248 Gross Welsh Rates CAWN eai 257 W Snow Tires 249 E EE O 257 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 249 257 MEL REM HERES codo dou ditio div eid de 7 E Trailer TOWING chest hipsi 259 Reformulated Gasoline 251 Warranty Requirements 259 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 251 Bl Recreational Towing MMT In Gasoline 252 Behind Motorhome Etc 261 STARTING AND OPERATING 207 STARTING PROCEDURES Normal Starting Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine has not started within 3 seconds slightly depress the accelerator pedal while continuing to crank If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting Long periods of engine idling especially at high engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera tures which can damage your vehicle Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running procedure WARNING Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an Do not leave animals or children inside par
17. ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART 1 1 1 10W 30 Preferred 1 1 1 W 30 1 1 1 20 0 10 20 32 60 80 29 18 12 7 0 16 27 Temperature range anticipated before next oil change 809c2ec8 3 5L Engines Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 5 7L Engines The recommended engine oil viscosity for vehicles equipped with the 5 7L engine is SAE 5W 20 NOTE Engine oils higher in viscosity may reduce fuel economy in vehicles equipped with 5 7L engines Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided that the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295 governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil
18. e Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli seatback This could impair visibility or become a sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision seat to come loose A child could be badly injured WARNING Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control result ing in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to rese
19. Kilometers 34 000 38 000 43 000 48 000 53 000 58 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve Replace the air conditioning filter X Rotate the tires X X X M A T E N A N C E S C H U L E S 8 342 SCHEDULE B Miles 39 000 42 000 45 000 48 000 51 000 54 000 Kilometers 62 000 67 000 72 000 77 000 82 000 86 000 Ng Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X em quired Replace the air cleaner filter X E Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X fem rotors Replace the rear axle fluid X ny Replace the air conditioning filter X Rotate the tires X X X E S 8 SCHEDULE 343 Miles 57 000 60 000 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 Kilometers 91 000 96 000 101 000 106 000 110 000 115 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Replace the air cleane
20. Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type E MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301 Front amp Rear Suspension Ball Joints The suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per formed Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed Drive Shaft Universal Joints Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints Peri odic lubrication of these joints is not required However the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed If leakage or damage is evident the universal joint boot and grease should be rep
21. Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below follow the step noted e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and release only when the EVIC display shows Channels Cleared after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be pro grammed at any time beginning with Programming step 2 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The EVIC display will show Channel X Transmit where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 for 20 seconds and then change to Channel X Training Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming step 2 For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 1
22. Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup List Phones e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cel
23. ganic Additive Technology Engine Oil 2 7 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 30 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil 3 5 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 10W 30 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil 57 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 20 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com partment Oil Filter 2 7 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equiv Oil Filter 3 5 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equiv Oil Filter 5 7 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equiv Fuel Selection 2 7 Liter 87 Octane Fuel Selection 3 5 Liter 89 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7 Liter 89 Octane 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE 1703 should be used Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Axle Mopar SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
24. mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn off the engine A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the pro gramming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender I
25. 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 232 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE Some vehicles have a Tire and Loading Infor mation placard located on the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 qt 1 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC NEVER XXX 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 E3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 43109268 J 811b5a9a This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires es STARTING AND OPERATING 233 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
26. CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 336 Schedule B i dades reU eae oars als Bl Maintenance 5 336 Schedule A 22 sudo urea ek RR M A T C S C H D U L E S 8 l N T E N A N C E S C H E U L E S 8 336 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establish ment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of California California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the condition
27. If Required Bi jump Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low Bi Driving On Slippery Surfaces 267 268 269 272 273 273 Acceleration Traction Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Towing A Disabled Vehicle With Ignition Key Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolley 264 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers depress the switch on the instrument panel When the Hazard Warn ing Switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer gency Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheat
28. Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing see the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the av
29. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped 14 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for servic
30. and a continuous chime will be heard when the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the Multi Function Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever towards you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS X The wipers and washers are operated by the multi function lever The lever is located on the left side of the steering column Rotate the end of the control lever to select the desired wiper speed 8125e17b Multi Function Lever Windshield Washers To use the front washer push the lever in and hold while spray is desired If the lever is released while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent inter val previously selected If the lever is pushed while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Rain Sensing Wipers lf Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is esp
31. be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new sentry keys to the system if you have two valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound The Theft Alarm Light will stop flashing turn on for 3 seconds then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of
32. fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3 product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure Fuel System Hoses Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses
33. make your selection When OFF the system reverts to standard intermittent wiper operation Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system DVD video system power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears to make your selection Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Tilt Mirrors Down on Reverse If Equipped When ON is selected the outside rearview mirrors will tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the RUN position The mirrors move back to their previous position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE Press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Park Assist System If Equipped When ON is selected and the driver places the gear selector in Reverse or Neutral the sys
34. may cause serious damage to the drive train and is not covered by the DaimlerChrysler warranty The TCS OFF switch is located on the center of the instrument panel To turn the traction control system OFF press the TCS OFF switch until the traction control Indicator in the instrument cluster lights up To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel switch off the TCS system by pressing the TCS switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 TCS OFF switch To turn the system back ON press the TCS OFF switch a second time until the traction control Indicator turns OFF NOTE e The traction control system comes on each time the ignition switch is turned ON This will occur even if you used the switch to turn the system OFF e The Traction Control system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM BAS IF EQUIPPED BAS is standard on vehicles equipped with electronic stability program ESP The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency brak ing maneuvers The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver s braking style This can help reduce braking distances The BAS comple ments the antilock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly
35. nect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher For UConnect Customer Support call 1 877 855 8400 or visit the UConnect website www chrysler com uconnect UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69 The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name This system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or brief case as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UCon nect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system The diagram below shows the mirror with th
36. seconds of running Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Theft Alarm Immobilizer Light comes on during normal vehicle operation vehicle has been running for longer than 10 seconds a fault has been detected in the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key related tran sponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it can not be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may
37. set the Mode control to Panel 7 and turn on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature 06 404 Temperature control for com 6 CIA COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor vl COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost ort if windows are clear 9 HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost 9 needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 81352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS WM Starting Procedures 207 Anti Lock Brake System 225 Normal Starting 207 Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 209 W Tire Safety Information la Transmission Shifting 209 Tire Markings 0 0 0 6 0 00 c 228 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 209 Tire Identification Number TIN 231 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 214 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
38. they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 800dfab6 an octane of 87 2 7L Engines REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD 89 800dfab7 3 5L and 5 7L Engines Continued heavy spark knock can cause engine dam
39. transmission remains in NEUTRAL ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279 Without The Ignition Key TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed VEHICLE WITH TOW DOLLEY with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap manufacture does not recommend that you tow this proved method of towing with out the ignition key is vehicle on a tow dolley Vehicle damage may occur with a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the limitations described in this section MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS W2 7L Engine Rm 284 M2 Engine 234 duwindes tat riis 285 credene REIR 286 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD 287 E Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs e er er db eyes 288 Replacement Parts 289 W Dealer Service 289 Bl Maintenance Procedures 290 Engine Qil isses nex 290 Engine Oil Filt t sss Rma 295 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tensioner ed dos bo boa ahs amp 295 Spark Plugs 4x ees
40. will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature The Headlamp delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Delay Turning Headlamps Off in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section for details Fog Lights If Equipped 40 The front fog light switch is on the headlamp switch below the dimmer control To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the fog lamp switch NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the Multi Function Lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes If either light has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective or there may be a circuit failure NOTE The message Turn Signal On will appear in the electronic vehicle information center EVIC if equipped
41. 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is pushed up and released speed increases es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is set push the lever down and hold COAST Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Pushing down and releasing the lever COAST once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is pushed down and released speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descend ing downhill This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery
42. 140 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 358 Universal Joints llle 301 Universal Transmitter 119 Unleaded Gasoline 250 Vanity Mirrors Rer ERR Variance Compass Vehicle Certification Label Vehicle Identification Number 6 Vehicle Loading 233 256 257 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 374 INDEX Vehicle Storage ed neke i nen 203 321 Vehicle Theft Alarm 24 Warning Flasher Hazard 264 Warnings and Cautions 6 Warranty Information 355 Washer Adding Fluid 108 302 Washers Windshield 106 Washing Vehicle 2 cce t eee 312 Wheel Alignment and Balance 242 Wheel and Wheel Trim 313 Wheel Bearings 311 Wind Buffeting 000 27 126 Window Airbag 37 43 Window Fogging s icfa creg poora casia is 197 203 VII OWS ose I ET 25 POWER ike DEO ei eR 25 Windshield Defroster 196 201 Windshield Washers 106 302 Windshield Wiper Blades 301 Windshield Wipers 106 Wiper Blade Replacement 301 Wipers Intermittent 108 Wipers Rain Sens
43. 17 Door Opener Garage 119 Drive Belts 295 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 301 Driver s Seat Glide Feature 95 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 276 Electric Remote Mirrors 67 Electrical Power Outlets 127 Electronic Speed Control 115 Electronic Stability Program 113 Electronic Vehicle Information Center 147 INDEX 365 Emergency In Case of Overheating esc y eme Rs 264 Emission Control System Maintenance 288 336 REM 285 286 Aur Cleanet cue bck ey PCR Ron he ee 296 Air Cleaner Filter 295 Block Heater 209 Break In Recommendations 57 Checking Oil Level 290 291 Compartment is cake oes 285 286 Coolant 333 COONS esi eter SP haus Saa ees 303 Exhaust Gas Caution 253 Fails to Start 208 Fuel Requirements 250 332 ose Goc bh hat ane rp med 290 332 333 Oil Change Interval 292 Oil Selection 292 332 Oil Synthetic oie esi eee cee Rn 294 Overheating 264 Temperature Gauge 143 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 43 Event Data Recorder 48 Exhaust Gas Caution
44. 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key has been lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open the doors The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on from the LOCK position NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock knob on B each door trim panel If the lock knob is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the
45. Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the DaimlerChrysler Corporation 24 Hour Towing Assistance Program Guide Paging To learn how to page refer to section Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which timeout a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to section Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phony system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to ente
46. If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required 288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come
47. Impact Accelerometer sensors e Side Impact Accelerometer sensors e Driver Airbag e Passenger Airbag e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Interconnecting Wiring e Knee Impact Bolsters E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 The side curtain airbag system on vehicles so equipped consists of the following Airbag Control Module AIRBAG Readiness Light Left and Right Side Curtain Airbags Above Side Windows Left and Right Side Impact Sensors Interconnection Wiring How The Airbag System Works The airbag control module determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The control module receives the level of colli sion severity determines the proper level of airbag to be deployed The frontal airbag inflators are designed to provide three different rates of airbag inflation The airbag control module will not detect a rollover The airbag control module also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instrument panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e The airbag control module also turns on the a AIRBAG light and the Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in the instr
48. Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track m number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection twice to move 2 selections etc Fast Forward FF Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape in the direction that it is playing The tape will advance until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Rewind RW Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape direction The tape will reverse until the button is pressed again or until the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Tape Eject Press this button and the cassette will disen A gage and eject from the radio TAPE Scan Button Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature Changing Tape Direction If you wish to change the direction of tape travel side being played press Preset 6 The lighted arrow in the display window will show the new direction Metal Tape Selection If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player the player will automatically select the correct equalization Pinch Roller Release If ignition power or the radio ON OFF switch are turned off the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect the tape from any dam
49. R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears 210 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Gear Ranges P Park WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into P Park remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmission shift lever is locked in the P Park position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Further more you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle Supplements the parking brake by locking the trans mission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake fir
50. VEHICLE You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity section Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination The UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the follow
51. W5W ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Inner Park Lamp and Outer Park Lamp 300 e Open the hood e Twist the appropriate bulb socket assembly counter clockwise and pull out Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs on driver s side head lamp assembly e Replace the bulb and push into socket assembly Reinstall the socket assembly and turn clockwise HIGH BEAM LOW BEAM HEADLAMP BULB HEADLAMP BULB 812c3fee PARK TURN LAMP BULB 812c4134 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp and Park Turn Lamp 300C High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID If Equipped The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself If a headlight bulb fails take your vehicle to INNER PARK OUTER PARK an authorized dealer for service LAMP BULB LAMP BULB s12c419e CAUTION WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlights when the headlight switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for servi
52. a complete stop and the e Vehicle speed engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Selector lever position The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before accelerating especially when the engine is cold Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 220 STARTING AND OPERATING If there is a need to restart your engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Trans mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles WARNING Itis dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit some
53. and replace if X X X X required Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X rotors Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt X and tensioner Replace if required Replace the spark plugs 2 7L 3 5L Engines X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve t Replace the engine timing belt Federal X Emissions equipped vehicles only 3 5L En Replace the engine timing belt California Emissions equipped vehicles only 3 5L En gine gine oo oa OS OTS CTT M A T E N A N C S C H U L S 8 350 SCHEDULE A Miles 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 100 000 102 000 Kilometers 125 000 134 000 144 000 154 000 160 000 163 000 Months 78 84 90 96 102 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 X months or 102 000 miles Replace the air conditioning filter X X Rotate the tires X X X X X This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty You can be badly injured working on or around a i This maintenance is not required if previously replaced Motor vehicle Do only for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If Inspection and service should also be performed anytime you have any doubt about your ability
54. and replace if re quired X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re quired Replace the air cleaner filter Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors Flush and replace the engine coolant Replace the engine timing belt Federal Emis sions 3 5L Engine Replace the engine timing belt California Emissions 3 5L Engine Replace the spark plugs 2 7L 3 5L Engines Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner Replace if required Change the rear axle fluid Replace the air conditioning filter Rotate the tires M A T E N A N C S C H D U L E S 8 346 SCHEDULE This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture Inspection and service should also be performed anytime to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re sions warranty ceipts i This maintenance is not required if previously replaced M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E U L E S 8 SCHEDULE A 347 SCHEDULE Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 Kilometers 10 000 19 000 29 000 38 000 48 000 58 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X qui
55. are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Supported file formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 96 60 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 5 2205 16 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 Layer 3 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback o
56. clear the malfunction indication Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift interlock system BTSI that holds the gearshift lever in the P Park position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the gear selector lever out of the P Park position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position and the brake pedal must be depressed Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in D Drive position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal opera tion 222 STARTING AND OPERATING AUTOSTICK If Equipped Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more control Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driv
57. concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 355 WARRANTY INFORMATION See your manufacturer s Warranty Information Booklet for information on warranty coverage and transfer of warranty 1 Yri 2 3 Yri Yr 5 Yr 7 8 Yr DESCRIPTION 12 000 24 000 36 000 50 000 Unimta 100 000 70 000 80 000 Special Extended Warranty Coverage Powertrain Limited Warranty 100 deductible Anti Corrosion Perforation Limited Warranty All Panels Outer Panels Federal Emission Warranty Federal Emission Warranty Specified Components California Emission Warranty California Emission Warranty Specified Components NOTE Vehicles used as a police vehicle taxi limousine postal delivery vehicle ambulance or rental vehicle are covered only under the 3 year 36 000 mile Basic Limited Warranty 8132c269 356 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists
58. door 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC position and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met The Auto Lock feature is enabled The transmission is in gear All doors are closed 1 2 3 4 5 6 The throttle is pressed The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch
59. either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button u
60. elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until US or METRIC appears to make your selection To Reset The Display Pressing and releasing the FUNCTION SELECT button once will clear the resettable function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable func tions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will be displayed during this 3 second window Compass Display Press and release the compass button to dis C play one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing and the outside temperature es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Man
61. entry is dialed System will reset and proper language will be set Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Phonebook If Espanol See system will Phonebook confirm Flowchart whether or not user wishes to change language to Spanish See Setup Flowchart System will reset and proper language will be set 81316290 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Phonebook Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Number New Entry Added Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Entries Listed one at a time Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified 1st Confirmation 2nd Confirmation Phonebook Cleared Enter Location Entry Deleted 8131b294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation is Confirmation Name Prompts on off Say 4 digit System Lists pin code Phones Say Name of New phone phone to List Phones will Start Pairing procedure on phone See phone s owner manual Phone System System Lists Enter Name of phone Deleted confirms Phones Assign Priority of phone 1 to 7 1 having highest priority Confirm whether or not to continue with language change keeping in mind that changing
62. flash as soon as the ESP system sensor s information varies from the driver s intended path The ESP warning light also flashes when traction control is activated If the ESP warning light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions When the ESP warning light is illumi nated continuously the ESP is switched off To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP press the ESP OFF switch the ESP warning light in the instrument cluster goes out Avoid spinning one drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drive train and is not covered by the DaimlerChrysler warranty To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel switch off the ESP system by pressing the ESP OFF switch ESP OFF Switch With the ESP system switched off the engine torque reduction feature is cancelled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable ESP al ways operates under braking even with the switch in the OFF position When the ESP system is disabled if one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin the brake is applied by the ESP system to control wheel slip This wheel slip control is active at vehicle speeds between approximately 24 mph 40 km h and 50 mph 80 km h es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR V
63. generated to inflate the side curtain airbags The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE way and inflates in about the same time it takes to blink Maintaining Your Airbag System your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is Modifications to any part of the airbag system only about 3 1 2 inches 8 4 cm thick when it is inflated could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body struc ture or frame You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Occupant Classification System The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this veh
64. head restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and
65. it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 23 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC If Equipped 03 5 FM Door Adar 812 4479 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and tachometer Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted switches described in this section will also be equipped with the EVIC This system conveniently al lows the driver to select
66. knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call Toll Free at 1 800 890 4038 U S or 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at www techauthority daimlerchrysler com Or www daimlerchrysler ca manuals 358 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federa
67. lamp assembly 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 7 Pull tail lamp assembly clear from vehicle to access bulbs Turn bulb sockets counter clockwise to remove BACKUP LAMP BULB 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE TAIL STOP TURN LAMP BULB SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB 1 812c4933 812c492f 8 Pull the appropriate bulb to remove it from the socket 9 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the tail light assembly 10 Close the trunk ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 Tail Stop Tail Turn Signal Lamp and Backup 3 Pull back the trunk liner Lamp 300C 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the 1 Open the Trunk tail lamp assembly 2 Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail lamp 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side assembly 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 812c4b54 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Pull tail lamp assembly clear from vehicle to access bulbs Turn bulb sockets counter clockwise to remove TAIL STOP LAMP BULB TAIL LAMP BULB 812c4925 812c48da TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB 812c48e1 BACKUP LAMP BULB 812c491d 8 Pull the appropriate bulb to remove it from the socket 9 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the tail light assembly 10 Close the trunk License Lamp 1 Remo
68. lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improp erly classified E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If the is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument p
69. may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE Use the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to open the trunk from outside the vehicle The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release Button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The transmission must be in Park before the switch will operate With the ignition ON the trunk open symbol will be displayed in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the key in lock position or key out the trunk open symbol will be displayed until the trunk is closed TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children ca
70. monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module The wheel sensors monitor tire pressure and status for all four active road tires and the spare tire The spare tire pressure is monitored but not displayed NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure 1 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indi cator Lamp will flash on and off for ten seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 5 Wheel Sensors e 4 Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules e Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Messages in the EVIC e Amber Colored Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp The system consists of tire pressure monitoring sensors attached to each wheel through the valve stem mounting hole a central receiver module Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Mes sages in the EVIC and an amber colored Indicator Lamp A sensor shall be installed in
71. not allow Recirculate to be selected while in the defrost or defrost floor modes Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging NOTE See Operating Tips chart for Manual A C Control at the end of this section for suggested control settings in different weather conditions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficie
72. or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to insure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to the Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts section for correct fluid type MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 CAUTION The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating condi tions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level Fluid and Filter Changes Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed as follows Maintenance schedule A No change necessary Maintenance schedule Every 60
73. other than Dk Blue indicated may result in a dangerous electrical 9 20 Console Power Outlet system overload If a properly rated fuse contin Yellow ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit 10 10Amp Rear Fog Lamp If Equipped that must be corrected Red 11 25 Amp Memory Module Door Locks Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses C BRKR Cavity Fuse Circuits 12 e s Passenger Power Seat T 60 Ignition Off Draw Clear 13 30 Amp Door Module Run Acc Delay 2 40 Amp Battery CADRE Green 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Fuse Circuits Cavity Fuse Circuits 14 10 Amp Sentry Key Remote Keyless 28 10 Amp Curtain Airbag if equipped Red Entry Cluster Red 15 20 Brake Light 5 7L 29 5 Amp Sentry Key Remote Keyless Yellow Orange _ Entry Powertrain Control 16 20 Power Outlet Trunk if Module Ignition Feed Yellow equipped 30 10 Amp Steering Column Module 17 um Red Power Mirrors if equipped 18 20 Selectable Power Outlet 31 Yellow 32 19 10 Amp Stop Lamp 33 Red 34 me 20 20 Rear Wiper If Equipped 35 5 Amp Power Antenna Garage Door Yellow Orange Delay 21 36 20 Radio Navigation 22 Yellow 23 37 15 Amp Transmission 24 Dk Blue 25 38 5 Amp Analog Clock Garage Door 26 Orange Opener 27 10Amp Airbag Occupant Classifica x
74. position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle The following indicators should be used to Gear Selector ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the Park position 5 Speed Automatic Transmission e When shifting into Park move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator window on the console to ensure it is in the P position en STARTING AND OPERATING 215 Park Position The PARK position is to be used when parking the vehicle Engage only with the vehicle stopped The PARK position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always use the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever in PARK to secure the vehicle PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion NOTE e Ifthe key is in the ACC or ON position you must press the brake pedal to shift out of the PARK position e The key can be removed from the ignition switch only with the selector lever in the PARK position With the key removed the selector lever is locked in the PARK position For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the interlock system In order to override this system the key must be in the ignition with
75. pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passe
76. return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station mode only Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrea
77. side of the instrument added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb panel on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade 224 STARTING AND OPERATING The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Lamp STARTING AND OPERATING 225 Anti Lock Bra
78. surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehi cle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice de layed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK P REVERSE R and NEUTRAL N will continue to operate SECOND gear will operate in the DRIVE D shifter position The Malfunction Indicator Lamp may be illuminated 218 STARTING AND OPERATING A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedure Stop the vehicle Move the selector lever to the PARK position Turn off the e
79. switch then all buttons on that transmitter will be disabled The buttons on the remaining transmitters will work If the vehicle is shifted out of PARK all the transmitter buttons are disabled for all keys 8125e0aa E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To unlock the doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowl edge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system also turns on The headlights will also activate and remain on for 90 seconds programmable when the doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual for details NOTE The system can also be programmed to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button Refer to Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual or simply follow these steps 1 Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after 4 sec onds press the LOCK button Release both buttons The Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st feature can be react
80. switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Cassette Satellite or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remained tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button and will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds satellite scan 8 seconds at each listenable station before continu ing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displaye
81. tails Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button which must be pushed in to lower the head restraint The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button 80b34e13 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Folding Rear Seat When the seat back is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seat back above the seat strap WARNING The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjust able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steerin
82. the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 2 Low Fuel Indicator Light The Low Fuel Light will turn on when there is approximately 2 gallons 9 liters of fuel remain ing in the tank This light will remain on until fuel is added 3 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows the front fog lights are ON 4 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center for specific messages only on vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted switches NOTE On non EVIC equipped vehicles the odometer is located here es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 7 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute r p m x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 8 Engine Tempera
83. the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights Headlight Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Multi Function Lever The multi function lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 8125e17b Multi Function Lever Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight park light and instrument panel light operation 3 Headlight Switch 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Headlights lf equipped This system automatically turns your headlights ON or OFF based on ambient light levels To turn the system ON rotate the headlamp switch counter clockwise to the AUTO A position When the system is ON the Head light Time Delay feature is also ON This means your headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System OFF move the headlamp switch out of the AUTO A position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come ON in the Automatic mode Headlamps On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only The headlights will turn on approximately 10 seco
84. the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position eA lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose sible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not d
85. the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off when the ignition is switched to the ACC or ON position after the panic alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Turn Off Flash Lights On Lock Unlock NOTE The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be turned on and off by referring to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC sec tion of this manual or by following these steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 4 seconds press the UNLOCK button Release both buttons en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration If your Remote
86. the switch in the ACC or ON positions Remove the rubber storage tray from the bin located to the right of the shifter lever The override can be activated by pressing the pink colored tab which can be accessed through a hole inside the bin While the override is pressed the shifter can be moved out of the park position without pressing the brake After operation return rubber storage tray to its original position Brake Interlock Override Reverse Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com pletely stopped 216 STARTING AND OPERATING Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed Do not engage in NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads The engine may be started in this range Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans mission damage that is not covered by the Limited Warranty Drive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent
87. this symbol to indicate the battery strength of the U Connect phone The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that a phone connection has been made 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that X the U Connect phone is currently not available Phone Not Avail able Navigation If Equipped Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation is displayed in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu display is active the SCROLL buttons can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE SELECT button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn By Turn Directions If Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings the Navigation System will provide turn by turn directions to the programmed destination in the EVIC display The name of the approaching road is displayed at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to show the direction of the turn and the remaining distance to the turn counted down Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press
88. to perform a a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re service job take your vehicle to a competent me ceipts chanic M A l N T E N A N C C H E U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle sess ia tesa en 352 Prepare For The Appointment 352 Prepare A List 4a c pace Faut 352 Be Reasonable With Requests 352 B If You Need Assistance 352 a Warranty Information 355 a Mopar Paris iios sua cor ean 356 Reporting Safety Defects 356 In Canada she dx b teas dive 356 Bl Publication Order Forms 356 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades 358 Jreadwear 2460465 EAR cae KEE RA x HES Traction Grades Temperature Grades 352 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a writte
89. to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly Do not overspeed en gine If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the NORMAL STARTING procedure should be repeated STARTING AND OPERATING 209 TRANSMISSION SHIFTING 4 Speed Automatic Transmission After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution Gear Selector Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or
90. vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflatio
91. when the airbag is turned OFF In the presence of a properly seated occupant when the PAD indicator light is illuminated the airbag is OFF Also when the Occu pant Classification System detects either an empty seat or a weight less than the predetermined threshold the ORC will not illuminate the PAD indicator light even though the airbag is turned OFF Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready for your protec tion in an impact While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data ma
92. wish to call The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second
93. you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e f your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 354 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States ca
94. 000 miles 96 000 km change fluid and filter under the following condi tions e Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Front And Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE What Causes Corrosion e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint paint and protecti
95. 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e You may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound fr
96. 24 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console Security If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the frequencies To erase all of the previously trained frequencies hold down both outside buttons until the green light begins to flash This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with 55 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc 81351e5e Press and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full open Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature causing the sunroof to open automatically ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof switch to open the vent The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full vent To close the sunroof from the vent position press and hold the switch forward Releasing th
97. 8 324 Headlights On With Wipers 104 107 High Beam Indicator 144 Illuminated Entry 15 Instrument Cluster orei 103 cse RE OR eye PIA 101 License m 331 Lights On Reminder 104 Malfunction Indicator 146 OiLPressure T ieas i 140 Reading e nn 118 Seat Belt Reminder 145 Service Py dee rdc dede 322 323 Service Engine Soon 146 Turn Signal 2a rr e REESE 103 105 Voltage ek eb I aos RS 146 Load Leveling System 132 Loading Vehicle sers sere srani nasrane 256 257 Capacities Tires Locks Door Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Lubrication Body Lumbar Support Maintenance Free Battery Maintenance Procedures Maintenance Schedule Light Duty Schedule Schedule A Schedule B Malfunction Indicator Light Manual Service Manual Transmission Memory Feature Memory Seat Mini Trip Computer Mirrors Automatic Dimming en INDEX 369 Electric Remote ee eee eee eee nee ee 67 Exterior Folding saysi neiger 66 Heated x oi wm eR ERR am Eos 67 csl tems bis mene IER 66 leatVieW ssec eed x ea ke xo eae 65 Vanity sacks acce ages Ro RR ea 68 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure S
98. CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is located near the left front corner of the windshield The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This P number also appears on the Automobile Information NOTE Itis illegal to remove the VIN plate Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Word About Your Keys il Ignition Key Removal 11 Key In Ignition Reminder 12 aes Key sos eoe aed ret etae ses 12 Replacement Keys 13 Customer Key Programming 14 General Information 14 Bl Illuminated Entry System
99. EHICLE 115 1 completely to the left and then to the right The BAS CAUTION malfunction indicator light should go out EE E ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL S ob ind ad mp aw ppc When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The speed control switch consists of a stalk mounted lever located on the steering column the OFF LOCK or ACC position Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes Synchronizing ESP The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is ESP combined with the BAS on some models If the power supply was interrupted battery discon nected or discharged the ESP BAS malfunc tion indicator light may be illuminated with the engine running Turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS malfunction indica tor light should go out If the power supply was interrupted battery BAS disconnected or discharged the BAS malfunc tion indicator light may be illuminated with the engine running Turn the steering wheel 8125e18c Electronic Speed Control Lever 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Activate Push and release the speed control lever ON OFF once and an LED on the lever will illuminate indicating that the electronic speed control is ON To turn the system OFF Push and release the lever ON OFF again and the system a
100. ELD 4 Y ELECTRICALLY DEFROST HEATED AIRBAG BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD CHARGING DEFROST SIDE AIRBAG ets t CU 2 ENGINE COOLANT CHILD SEAT WINDSHIELD WIPER TEMPERATURE TETHER ANCHOR AND WASHER HAZARD S SRS A AIRBAG LOWER ANCHORS MALFUNCTION AND TETHER FOR SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATOR LIGHT CHILDREN LATCH RESTRAINT SYSTEM WINDOW LOCK D HIGH BEAM D LOW BEAM 0 FRONT FOG LIGHT X Y EXTERIOR BULB FAILURE oT DOME LIGHT 200 PARK LIGHTS LL LIGHTER bes 7 i HORN UPPER AIR OUTLET HEATED SEAT Low 9 KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH e up HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR OUTLET RECIRCULATION 9 LIFTGATE RELEASE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN AND UI TATE LOWER AIR OUTLET Q5 amp SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK RELEASE AIR CONDITIONING Dm amp EMERGENCY SLIDING DOOR CONVERTIBLE TOP UP RELEASE HANDLE Za PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE TOP DOWN AIRBAG OFF INTRODUCTION 5 a 2 DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE PEDALS 1 WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR te CONVERTIBLE VOICE RECOGNITION 4 WINDOW DOWN BUTTON UCONNECT BUTTON POWI STEERING FLUID o R SEE OWNER S TRACTION CONTROL MANUAL ISO INSTUMENT PANEL WARNING ILLUMINATION X BAS oN BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM MASTER LIGHTING SWITCH 812ccfd5 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND
101. ERY POST BOTTLE FLUID CHECK OIL FILL BOTTLE FLUID CHECK 8125e2bd 286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5 7L ENGINE POWER AUTOMATIC COOLANT BRAKE FLUID DISTRIBUTION TRANSMISSION PRESSURE RESERVOIR COOLANT CENTER FLUID FILL CAP ACCESS COVER BOTTLE WASHER REMOTE JUMP START ENGINE OIL ENGINE AIRCLEANER POWER STEERING BOTTLE POSITIVE BATTERY POST FLUID CHECK FILL FILTER FLUID CHECK 8126ac44 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light on could cause further damage to the emis sion control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed
102. EXCEED 32 SQ FT If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg 2 7L EN 3 5L EN 5 7L EN loaded it should have its own brakes and they GINE GINE GINE should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING UPTO3 1000 lbs 2000 Ibs 2000 Ibs PERSONS 454 kg 907 kg 907 kg amp LUG GAGE UP TO 4 1000 Ibs 1500 Ibs 1500 Ibs Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic PERSONS 454 kg 680 kg 680 kg brake lines can overload your brake system and amp LUG cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you GAGE need them and could have an accident UPTO5 1000165 1000 Ibs 1000 Ibs PERSONS 454 kg 454 kg 454 kg amp NO LUG GAGE RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHONE ETC Recreational towing on this vehicle is not recommended A load equalizing hitch is recommended for loaded trailer weights above 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for weights above 2 000 Ibs 907 kg NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all 4 wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll Hazard Warning Flasher B If Your Engine Overheats H Jacking And Tire Changing Preparations For Jacking Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage Jacking And Changing a Tire Compact Spare Tire Wheel Cover Installation
103. Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play 170 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 171 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play 173 Load Bject Button CD Mode For Play 174 Sales Code RAK AM FM Cassette CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone Video MP3 And WMA Capabilities 175 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 176 Operating Instructions Tape Player 179 Seek Button ces ben gene 179 Fast Forward FF 179 Rewind 179 Tape Eject ere rece 180 Scan Button escoger ia re 180 Changing Tape Direction 180 Metal Tape Selection 180 Pinch Roller Release 180 INois Reduetion i epos nsis ein pae atr a 180 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play 180 Load Bject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play 181 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 183 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135 Operation Instructions Satellite Antenna 189 Reception Quality
104. INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point outside or recirculated Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than any air outside or on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable on or off 81341de7 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and select the d
105. Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the transmitter buttons facing down remove the small screw and separate the two halves of the transmit ter Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during removal 8135d46d 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the transmitter case join the two halves of the case together Install and tighten the screw until snug Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves Test transmitter operation VEHICLE THEFT ALARM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition switch for unauthorized entry or operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn will pulse headlights park lights will flash the Vehicle Theft Alarm Immobil
106. L 183 Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play BUTTONS 1 6 CD MODE For CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported media disc types The file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported medium formats file systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats
107. NG BASE SYSTEM The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPM system uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE Itis particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 243 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indi cator Lamp will flash on and off for ten seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 5 Wheel Sensors e Amber Colored Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp The system will consist of tire pressure monitoring sensors attached to each wheel through the valve stem mounting hole a central receiver module and an amber colored Indicator Lamp A sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 244 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE For vehicles with optional wheel tire sizes and significantly dif
108. NG ME WARNING VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap charts that follow This information should be used for slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck passenger and luggage loading as indicated canse If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo do not The volatility of some gasolines may cause a exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase while you drive This pressure can result in a spray of gasoline and or vapors when the cap is removed from a hot vehicle Removing the cap slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents The label contains the following information fuel spray Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door Name of manufacturer Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear portable container that is inside of a vehicle You Vehicle Identification Number VIN could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Type of Vehicle Month D
109. OADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode For MP3 and WMA Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the file or MP3 and WMA selection T
110. OR 3 Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Channels Defaulted Did Not Train Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer mm to Starting And Operating Tire Section Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Service Park Assist System with a single chime Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the Trip Functions is displayed in the EVIC Use the SCROLL buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The Trip Functions mode displays information on the following e Average Miles Per Gallon MPG Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset it will go to 0 0 e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined using the MPG for the last few minutes This is not resettable e Trip A Shows the total distance travelled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance travelled for trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total
111. PCM Lt Blue 12 21 50 ABS Pump Motor 13 Red 14 20 Powertrain Control Module 2 40 Radiator Fan High Low Yellow Green 15 20 Amp Injectors Ignition Coils 23 50 Amp High Intensity Lighting Yellow Red 16 20 Amp Powertrain Control Module 24 Z Yellow 25 30 Amp Lighting Left High Beam 17 30 Antilock Brake System ABS Pink Right Low Beam Pink Valves 26 20 Amp Transmission 18 30 Windshield Wiper Washer Lt Blue Pink 27 30 Amp Lighting Left Low Beam 19 50 Radiator Fan Pink Right High Beam Red 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays 55 x g E E 812da393 81344fb9 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 CAUTION Cavity Fuse Circuits 3 e When installing the Power Distribution Center 4 40 Battery cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Green erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so 5 30 Amp Heated Seat Steering Column may allow water to get into the Power Distribu Pink tion Center and possibly result in a electrical 6 20 Fuel Pump system failure Yellow When replacing a blown fuse it is important to 7 use only a fuse having the correct amperage 8 15Amp Ignition Start Run Start rating The use of a fuse with a rating
112. S 271 JACK SADDLE SUPPORT MUST BE POSITIONED DIRECTLY UNDER THE FLANGE OF THE SILL 812dab8b 272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN 7 Remove the lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand do not pry off 8 Mount the spare tire For vehicles equipped with wheel covers see the wheel cover installation instruc tions Do not attempt to install a wheel cover on a compact spare 9 Tighten all the lug nuts on the mounting studs 10 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 11 Fully tighten the lug nuts Torque the wheel lug nuts to 100 ft Ib 135N m 12 Store the flat tire jack and tools WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity e Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI 414 KPa Cold Inflation Pressure e Avoid dr
113. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL hh nnn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2555 ehh ence s hts 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES eee i hc nn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE cc ccc cece c cece cece cece cere i hm nnn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cc cece ccc cece cere cere cere eee hi mnn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cece hh msn 10 INDEX sex 9 9399 v SOTA AY Ya em y a s Y v VE TE INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Introduction 4 Bi Vehicle Identification Number 6 How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION EBEN INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the ma
114. The 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occu pants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more air flow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver s or passenger s control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation The air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will cause an audible beep and the LED will flash three times and remain off This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not neces sary The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing this button will tem porarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions suc
115. This light will turn on continuously when 1 is Low tire pressure condition The light will also turn on if a problem exist with any tire sensor When a system fault is detected the indicator lamp will flash repetitively for ten seconds The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL reset The light will remain on or flashing until the tire pressure is properly set or the problem with the sensor is corrected This light will turn on momentarily as a bulb check when the engine is started When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly underin flated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the tire and loading information placard Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinfla tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Each tire including the spare should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the tire and loading information placard 22 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system volt age The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving
116. UNE Control CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade AM FM Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode For MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Bject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone if equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode if equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES if equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation To acti
117. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions The instrument panel features four dual vane airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially block airflow 81350206 Press this button to turn on and off the air condi tioning Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected by the mode selector Press the button a second time to turn off the air conditioning The button includes an LED that illuminates when compressor op eration is selected UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Electric Rear Window Defroster Blower Control Press this button to turn on the rear wi
118. a with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of DaimlerChrysler product litigation involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage e Airbag deployment level if applicable 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap e Seatbelt status e Brake status service and parking brakes e Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash stat
119. a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following System Status Vehicle information warning message displays Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped Personal Settings customer programmable features Compass display Outside temperature display HS Trip computer functions UConnect hands free communication system dis plays If Equipped Navigation system screens If Equipped Audio mode display Press and release the MENU button and the 5 mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Navigation If Equipped System Status Personal Settings and Telephone If Equipped 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button ac cepts a selected choice The Function Select button also advances the radio preset when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen Use the SCROLL buttons to scroll through Trip A Functions Navigation If Equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features The SCROLL buttons also seek up and down radio station or CD track number The AUDIO MODE SELECT button is used to D select the Compass Temp Audio screen If Compass Temp Audio is already being dis played when the AUDIO MODE SELECT but ton is pressed the radio mode will change from AM to FM to Tape to CD or to Satellite SAT depending on which radio is in the vehic
120. ack begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc Satellite Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable satellite channel and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable satellite channel RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitu
121. additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain coolant concentration at 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze minimum in water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 e Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator and the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance e Increasing engine speed at idle does not reduce cool ant temperature Put transmission in NEUTRAL and let engine idle at normal engine idle speed Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secu
122. age When power is restored to the tape player the pinch roller will automatically reengage and the tape will resume play Noise Reduction The Dolby Noise Reduction System is on whenever the tape player is on but may be switched off To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System Press Preset 1 after you insert the tape The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is off Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo ratories Licensing Corporation Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks and WMA es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Inserting Compact Disc s CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play wi
123. age and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Meth
124. ailable cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 234 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustra tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg STARTING AND OPERATING 235 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 165 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 105 Occupant 2 180 tbs Occupant 3 150 ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811 4411 236 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tire is dangerous Overloading can caus
125. ak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface fully closed windows e dry weather condition ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English and Spanish accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say send Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook UConnect phonebook name tag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phonebook You can say letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows and e
126. and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 file formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 MPEG Sampling Fre Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected Specification quency kHz Bitrate by the following 320 256 224 e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 192 160 128 CD R media Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer 160 128 144
127. and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacture s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tensioner Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low gen erator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer ence between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entir
128. and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings is displayed in the EVIC Use the SCROLL buttons to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 functions and navigation system Pressing the FUNC TION SELECT button while in this display selects En glish Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language Display English or Metric The EVIC odometer and navigation system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until US or METRIC appears to make your selection Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH 24 Km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neutral position Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When DRIVER S DOOR IST is selected only the d
129. and the yellow ESP warning light in the instrument cluster both come on with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the BAS ESP malfunction indicator light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the BAS or the ESP system If this light stays illuminated have the BAS and ESP checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM ESP IF EQUIPPED WARNING ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving condi tions The system operates when the vehicle speed is greater than 7 8 mph 12 6 km h The ESP system corrects for over understeering of the vehicle by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel Engine torque is also limited 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The ESP warning light located in the instru ment cluster starts to
130. anel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e The Occupant Classification Module is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision e The Passenger Airbag Disabled PAD Indicator Light indicates to the driver and passenger
131. anol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system com ponents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Sulfur In Gasoline Your vehicle may have been designed to meet California low emission standards when using cleaner burning California reformulated gasoline with low sulfur This vehicle may be sold nationwide Your vehicle will oper ate sa
132. antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o clock positions 812c4479 Some models feature an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC with driver interactive display This is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and tachometer The audio mode of the EVIC can display any one of twelve radio station preset frequencies CD disc number CD track D 4 number tape or one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending on which radio is in the vehicle The VOLUME switch controls the volume of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume The AUDIO MODE SELECT button c
133. ar as necessary to make the belt make your injuries in a collision much worse You go around your lap might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not a biton the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too protect you properly The lap portion could ride too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug high on your body possibly causing internal injuries belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you collision A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increas ing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike
134. arm or disarm the system e The system remains armed during trunk entry Press ing the trunk button will not disarm the system If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the system is armed the doors can not be unlocked from the interior power door lock switches The Vehicle Theft Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system The alarm system will be activated when the battery is connected if the system was previously armed The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position The window lock switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors When the lock switch is pressed th
135. at as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint See the section on Child Restraint 2 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 3 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 4 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 5 If your vehicle has left and right side curtain airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has left and right side curtain airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag System Components The front airbag system consists of the following e Airbag Control Module e AIRBAG Readiness Light e PASS AIRBAG OFF Readiness Light e Front
136. ate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play BUTTONS 1 6 CD MODE For CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Bject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported media disc types The file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Supported medium formats file systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator
137. ation blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire STARTING AND OPERATING 231 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire mm safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits
138. ature can be turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If equipped Refer to Headlamps On With Wipers in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for details 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low speed wiper operation or to the third detent for High speed operation Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are 6 possible delay wiper positions The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when Low Washer Fluid Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center equipped vehicles or the low washer sym bol non Electronic Vehicle Informatio
139. ay and Hour of Manufacture MDH en STARTING AND OPERATING 257 The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service l
140. ay result in damage to the vehicle Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A T C S C H D U L E S 8 Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transmission and add as needed 338 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct e Inspect the brake hoses e Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension e Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for components proper fit e Check the automatic transmission fluid level Check the coolant level hoses and clamps e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the exhaust system M A l N T E N A N C E S C H U L E S 8 SCHEDULE 339 SCHEDULE Follow schedule if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 96 000 km if the vehicle is usually operate
141. bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy only in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the side curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled up in the rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt see section on Child Restraint should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the se
142. bin The storage bin has a rubber mat for noise control The bin is also large enough to hold a portable AC DC converter to power lap tops games or other electrical equipment Two slots at the top right side of the bin provide clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptops cell phones or other electrical equipment A four slot coin holder can hold US dollar coins or Canadian one and two dollar coins as well as quarters dimes and nickels The bin has a Front opening lid for easy access inside by either the driver or front passenger There are also two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with the navigation radio an extra storage bin is pro vided below the climate controls that holds up to four CD jewel cases The inside portion of the arm rest lid contains a pen holder a tissue holder and a tire gauge holder ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Cargo Tie Down Hooks e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put The tie downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when SNP e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear vehicle is moving axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the m WARNING vehicle to sway
143. button and observe the EVIC display If the EVIC display shows Channel X Transmit where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 programming is complete and your device should acti vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one NOTE If your hand held transmitter appears to pro gram the universal transceiver but your garage door does not operate using the transmitter and your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 your garage door opener may have a multiple security code system rolling code system Please proceed to steps 6 8 to 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most common garage door openers require this step 6 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manu facturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight 8 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code
144. c converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers are not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under the New Vehicle Warranty NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning 254 STARTING AND OPERATING e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon ADDING FUEL monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Push in on the left side near t
145. call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second callis in progress To go back to the first call refer to section Toggling Between Two Calls To combine two calls refer to section Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has been placed on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button for 1 to 3 seconds Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described in section Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating tha
146. ce Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge Headlights HID when the headlights are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges e Open the hood e Twist the appropriate bulb socket assembly counter clockwise and pull out Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs on driver s side head lamp assembly Replace the bulb and push into socket assembly Reinstall the socket assembly and turn clockwise LOW BEAM HEADLAMP BULB HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP BULB siacstaa PARK TURN LAMP BULB 812 4103 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Backup Lamp Side Marker Lamp and Tail Stop Turn Lamp 300 1 Open the Trunk 812c4b54 2 Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail lamp 3 Pull back the trunk liner assembly 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the tail
147. ch rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seat back and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where pos sible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and route the tether strap around the outboard side of the
148. d If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE For CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace NOTE MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders only Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANE
149. d for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast if available from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID mm will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE wi
150. d the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Satellite Radio or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME MSG or INFO Button Radio Mode Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will
151. d under one or more of the conditions marked with an 9 Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C Stop and go driving Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vices e Off road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual M A T C E S C H U L S 8 16 3 2 Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 18 000 Kilometers 5000 10000 14 000 19 000 22000 29 000 Ng Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X em quired Replace the air cleaner filter X E Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X fem rotors Replace the air conditioning filter X PB Rotate the tires X X X U L E S 8 SCHEDULE B 341 Miles 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 33 000 36 000
152. de Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar For vehicles other than passenger cars the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either the B pillar the Certification Label or in the Tire Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO PILLAR The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated 238 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
153. de so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE On vehicles so equipped the radio steering wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off and the driver door has not been opened This feature is programmable through the electronic vehicle information center EVIC if equipped Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section for details CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition take the following precautions 1 Do not use cassette tapes longer than C 90 otherwise sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin ished 2 Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from slackness and dust when it is not in use 3 Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight heat and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 4 Before inserting a tape make sure that the label is adhering flatly to the cassette 5 Aloose tape should be corrected before use To rewind a loose tape inse
154. dered the responsibil ity of the owner wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid auto matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective fin ish If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Interior Care Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with a mild detergent then MOPAR Vinyl Cleaner if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed p
155. ditional information on HomeLink call 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com WARNING A moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener mod els manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com for safety information or assistance Programming HomeLink NOTE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage It is also recom mended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driverinteractive display which includes HomeLink system messages The EVIC is located in the upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and tachometer 812c4479 Electronic Vehicle Information Center 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and release only when the EVIC display shows Channels Cleared after 20 seconds Do not hold the buttons fo
156. dry weather condition e Operation from driver seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loud ness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to occasionally loose connection to the UConnect system When this hap pens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Reset In rare instances it may be necessary to reset the UCon nect system The reset feature is exercised by pressing and holding the UConnect and Voice Recognition buttons simultaneously for 15 seconds Normally you do not need to exercise this feature Power Up After switching ignition key from LOCK to either ON or ACC position or after a reset you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system Voice Tree Enter Number Number is Dialed Main Menu Redial Towing Assistance Last Dials Number towing on Phone assistance is redialed 800 number Emergency Confirms whether or not to dial 91 and dials it if confirmation successful If English system will confirm whether or not user wishes to change language to English Number associated with
157. e WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 15 Trip Odometer Button Trip Odometer Button Standard Cluster The word TRIP will appear when this button is pressed Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles or kilometers A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer Trip Odometer Button Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 16 High Beam Light E This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Push the Multi Function lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam 17 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 18 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check During the bulb c
158. e Remove the Spare tire e Remove the fastener securing the jack 812c555e Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the spare tire e Open the trunk e Lift the access cover using the pull strap 81344fb9 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 269 e Remove the fastener securing the spare tire 3 Before raising the vehicle use lug wrench to carefully pry off wheel cover if equipped with steel wheels or center cap if equipped with aluminum wheels Jacking and Changing a Tire 8133d194 1 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire Passengers WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel should not remain in the vehicle hen the vehicle is being jacked ne ee d M QUE covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges and retention teeth N BLOCKA 2 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 270 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 Before raising the vehicle loosen but do not remove 5 Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack the lug nuts of the flat tire using the lug wrench Turn the saddle with the lift area of the sill flange use the lift area wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is closest to the flat tire still on the ground 6 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIE
159. e appropriate buttons Individual button behavior is discussed in the Operation section NOTE For the best performance of the hands free system s audio and voice recognition adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least a 1 2 inch gap 1 cm between the overhead console and the mirror 8105b20d Uconnect Buttons The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone If your cellular phone supports a different profile eg Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details 70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can either be adjusted from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or anot
160. e can be opened manually It will also open as the sunroof opens The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive clean
161. e displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed Selecting Satellite Mode in REF RAQ and RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode RAO and RAK Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474
162. e of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic 290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 2 7L 3 5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained a
163. e road may be a poor driver and cause a collision which includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the front seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat body and can take the forces of a collision the Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could plate up the webbing as f
164. e set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter For proper type of replacement spark plugs refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Informa tion label in the engine compartment Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con ditions the filter element should be inspected periodi cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule B 296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank filter replacement may be necessary See your local dealer for service Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under no
165. e switch will stop the movement of the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the switch is pushed forward again NOTE The power sunroof switches remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature This feature is programmable through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for details Express Open Feature The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate stop or comfort stop position This feature is designed to elimi nate wind buffeting at vehicle speeds between 20 40 mph 82 64 km h To operate this feature momentarily press the switch rearward to activate the Express Open Feature and the glass will automatically stop at the comfort stop position Pressing the switch rearward again will fully open the sunroof During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature To close the sunroof hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed forward again The sunshad
166. e tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure en STARTING AND OPERATING 237 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Underinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ri
167. e window controls on the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passen ger windows will be disabled Auto Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an auto down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition switch has been turned off Open ing either front door will cancel this feature The time is customer programmable through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Per sonal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for details Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the i
168. ean Air 251 Gasoline Reformulated 251 Gauges Coolant Temperature 143 P el 2e e teh pU Rx ne 145 Speedometer 140 Tachometer eee eee eee 141 Gear Ranges o Re E eee a 210 General Information 14 223 247 Glass Cleaning em RE Rp 314 Gross Axle Weight Rating 257 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 257 Hands Free Phone 68 Hazard Warning Flasher 264 Head Restraints 96 Headlights RR eae bas 324 High Beam ssi cc vee she Caceres 106 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 106 On With Wipers 104 107 PASSING i eu Pa aoe GS oa E OS ge 106 Switch 64 4 480 ede Sh ee oa 103 Time Delay eccc0 ste RR tit 104 Heated Seats 92 Heater Engine Block 209 Holder Cup bie 129 Homelink Transmitter 119 en INDEX 367 Hood Releas 222 o Ri 99 Hoses XU 307 310 Ignition Key Vx d ax e e ab d Eo nn 11 Illuminated ENY iste aen 15 Immobilizer i234 Shek RES X4G AS E EXE 12 Infant Restraint 50 Information Center Vehicle 147 Instrument Cluster 138 139 140 Instrument Panel and Controls 137 In
169. ecially useful when road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead requires quick but brief wiping action The sensitivity of the system to the amount of water on the glass can be adjusted with the rotary knob on the wiper stalk Wiper delay positions 1 6 indicate the rain sensing wiper sen sitivity where 1 is the least sensitive and 6 is the most sensitive NOTE The rain sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the LOW or HIGH speed position CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than OFF NOTE customer programmable feature in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sense feature to be turned off Refer to Personal Set tings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center sec tion of this manual for details Mist Feature Push the wiper lever in to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is pushed in the wipers will continue to operate Headlamps On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only The headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature This fe
170. econds If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system 226 STARTING AND OPERATING is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short t
171. ed high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passen ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 362 INDEX Adding Fuel 2 pe Rr RE tikus 254 Adding Washer Fluid 108 302 Additives Fuel llle 253 Adjustable Pedals 98 Air Conditioner Maintenance 299 Air Conditioning eb 194 Air Conditioning Filter 203 300 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 204 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 299 Air Conditioning System 194 Air Pressure Tires 237 PTD AGS eue ve Gene aam ea VILE BW Om A ex 37 Airbag Deployment 41 42 Airbag Light i e Rb b SR 41 48 58 142 Airbag Maintenance 44 Airbag Side eee ear imris 43 Airbag Window secuiesc terisi ritesa uk 37 43 Alarm System 24 Alignment and Balance 242 Alterations Modifications Vehicle
172. ed in either the BAS or the Electronic Stability Program ESP system If this light stays illuminated have the BAS and ESP checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible The yellow malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS on some models The yellow BAS malfunction indica tor light and the yellow ESP warning light in BAS ESP BAS 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME the instrument cluster both come on with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the BAS ESP malfunction indicator light comes on continu ously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the BAS or the ESP system If this light stays illuminated have the BAS and ESP checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 11 Airbag Light This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an autho rized dealer as soon as possible Cd t 12 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied there is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the anti lock brake system The dual brake syste
173. efer to the HANDS FREE PHONE UConnect section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual SALES CODE RAQ AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS VES CAPABILITIES 44 RW FF p gt i44 SEEK gt gt LOAD vor X K E i Q si CORDS 6 DISC 1 2 3 4 5 RND DIR j c JIE j PTY 81365bb1 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off an
174. equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Program ming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink step 3 with the following NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink The EVIC display will show Channel X Trained where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Proceed with Programming step four to complete
175. equired to turn the PAD Indicator Light on in the unlikely event that a rear facing infant seat is installed in front passenger seat NOTE Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Passenger Front Passenger Seat Occupant Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Airbag Status Small Objects Light Airbag Status OFF ON Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other ON OFF Relatively Light Objects Empty or Very OFF OFF Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when they are riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occupant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects
176. er and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 volt electrical outlets on this vehicle Both of the outlets are protected by an automatic reset circuit breaker The automatic circuit breaker restores power when the overload is removed The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package has power available only when the ignition is on This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result NOTE If desired the power outlet next to the ash tray receiver if equipped can be converted by your autho rized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The center console outlet is powered directly from the Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge suffi ciently to degrade batt
177. er to select a higher or lower range of gear ratios Moving the lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will be shown in the transmis sion gear display located in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the Overdrive mode the transmission will oper ate automatically shifting between the five available gears When you wish to engage autostick simply move the shift lever to the Right or Left D D position while in DRIVE The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch on the brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application STARTING AND OPERATING 223 Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the Park position Ra Parking Brake Release When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in Park otherwise Parking Brake the load on the transmission locking mechanism may To release the parking brake pull out on the parking make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an brake release located on the left
178. er will refill within 5 seconds of shifting from P Park into any other gear position Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into second gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected Park P Reverse R and Neutral N will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK P e Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine e Shift into and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required 214 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should shift the transmission into Park remove the key from the ignition and apply the park brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmission shift lever is locked in the Park
179. erating Tips 204 Summer Operation 202 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 1 2 3 4 1 5 6 1 7 1 2 4 19 18 1 Air Outlet 13 12 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Glove Box 15 Ignition Switch 3 Electronic Vehicle Information Center 9 Radio 16 Trip Odometer Button 4 Hazard Switch 10 Climate Controls 17 Hood Release 5 Passenger Air Bag Off Light 11 Heated Seat Switch 18 Parking Brake Release Lever 6 Analog Clock 12 Power Outlet 19 Trunk Release Switch 7 Electronic Stability Program Off Button 13 Ash 20 Headlamp Switch Traction Control System Off Button 14 Storage Compartment If Equipped 8125e1c6 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STANDARD INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 23 7 16 14 13 12 11 10 812b3de5 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 812b3c09 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Oil Pressure Warning Light HE This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A continuous chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until
180. ery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with acces sories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your war ranty es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 CUPHOLDERS Push down on the cover 300 Touring and 300C only as shown to expose the cupholders Close the cover when Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console Front Seat Cupholders 300 Front Seat Cupholders 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cup holders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants el bows STORAGE Console Features The center console includes a large internal storage
181. ery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling 8134298a Battery Location ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299 CAUTION WARNING It is essential when replacing the cables on the e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants battery that the positive cable is attached to the approved by the manufacturer for your air condi positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving p
182. ess and release the compass button to exit Telephone If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Telephone is displayed in the EVIC When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC pro vides the following telephone information e Phone status idle voice mail roaming battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 per cent e Call status Incoming call connecting connected air time in minutes and seconds call ended call failed roaming and no phone connection e U Connect Active e Caller ID phone number display When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC will display the following telephone symbols Signal Strength v Incom ing Call Analog IN Roam ing The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the signal strength of the U Connect phone The number of horizontal bars increase as the strength of the U Connect phone signal in creases The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an incoming call The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the U Connect phone is currently in analog mode The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the U Connect phone is currently in roaming Voice Mail Text Message Cd Battery Strength Call in Progress UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that you have voice mail The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a text message The EVIC displays
183. etween the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse and Drive Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability Program or Traction Control System in your Owner s Manual for Details WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h w
184. exit and the same distance forward after entry provided that the seat is not in the full rearward position After entry the seat will return to its previously set position after one of the following occurs e The ignition switch is turned on e The seatbelt is fastened the seat moves when the seat belt buckle is buckled The seat moves when the seat belt buckle is buckled This feature can be turned off by performing the follow ing procedure 1 Press and hold the Set S button on the memory seat switch located on the driver s door panel 2 Move the horizontal seat switch rearward Release the Set 5 button and the horizontal seat switch During exit the seat will move rearward from the set position when the key is removed from the ignition providing that the seat is not in the full rearward position This feature can be turned on or off by performing the following procedure 1 Press and hold the Set S button 2 Move the horizontal seat switch rearward 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Release the Set S button and the horizontal seat switch NOTE The glide feature is only available on the driver s seat NOTE On vehicles equipped with an EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Optional these functions can be selected at the EVIC using the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center Personal Settings for de
185. f MP3 and WMA files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 and WMA Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode For MP3 and WMA Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next file Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode For MP3 and WMA Play LOAD EJT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player The radio display will show L
186. f a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTERS 81265248 This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the in
187. f the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct Analog Clock SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY 4 RW FF p gt TUNE 0 8118787a Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player or Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in
188. feature provides the customer with a better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up The mirrors move back to their previous position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE This feature is disabled from the factory but can be enabled by the electronic vehicle information center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this manual for details Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged and may move either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Outside Mirror Driver s Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to the vehicle This type of mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67 Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in thi
189. ferent tire placard pressures the placard pressure value and the low pressure threshold value is re programmable at your authorized dealer to accommo date the customer selected wheel tire combinations rec ommended by DaimlerChrysler CAUTION The TPM system has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPM system pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sen sor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPM system as damage to the sensors may result CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor NOTE e The TPM system can inform the driver of a low tire pressure condition e The TPM system is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPM system should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure en STARTING AND OPERATING 245 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING PREMIUM SYSTEM The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPM system uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
190. g e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration you need to re enter names to the phonebook and re pair re link phone s Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing
191. g wheel tilt and seat position The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals can be adjusted while driving The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is ON If the vehicle is equipped with memory seats a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be ad justed when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Ad justable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with memory seat feature your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory seat buttons on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the adjustable pedals to saved positions Refer to the Seats section for details ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood First pul
192. gnition switch has been turned off The time is customer programmable through the electronic vehicle information center EVIC if equipped Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section for details Opening either front door will cancel this feature E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window NOTE Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the auto up function will be disabled To reactivate the auto up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored e Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely then hold the switch for a second e Push the window switch firmly down to second detent to open the window automatically until the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle
193. h as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present This will cause an audible beep and the LED will illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 NOTE The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the climate control sensor s location Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto matic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain off until the engine warms up However the fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is selected or if you manually select a blower speed Under certain conditions after the vehicle is turned off the climate control system may recalibrate and a noise may be heard for 20 seconds This is part of normal operation Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the customer can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range used when the AUTO setting is not desired The left control can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart below for details 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR
194. hanges the mode of the radio from AM to FM to Tape to CD or to Satellite SAT depending on which radio is in the vehicle The FUNCTION SELECT button advances the radio to the next preset changes the tape side being played or changes the current disc when used in audio mode The SCROLL buttons change selections such as radio station CD track or satellite radio chan nel depending on the current mode es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 The following describes the operation of the SCROLL buttons in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station Tape Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next selection on the cassette Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second selection three times it will play the third etc Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to switch the side of the tape to be played CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current tr
195. he edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle 81368080 STARTING AND OPERATING 255 CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap and may result in a malfunction indicator light on the instrument clus ter A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not secured properly the Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will turn on Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 256 STARTING AND OPERATI
196. he letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High Flotation tire sizing is based on 0 5 design standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT en STARTING AND OPERATING 229 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Milimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in 230 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions ie tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identific
197. he right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade SET Button Radio Mode To SET The Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM
198. heck if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert in the Occu pant Restraints section for more information 19 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 20 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light f This light informs you of a problem with the lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 selector is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable how ever see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or en gine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 21 Tire Pressure Monitor Warning Light If Equipped
199. hen you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h 278 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES EE TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles 48 km and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans mission geartrain failure If the transmission is not op erative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles 48 km the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed or the drive shaft disconnected at the rear axle drive flange CAUTION Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result The only approved method of towing is with a flat bed truck Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the
200. her prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing For each of the feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can either use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know what your options are at any prompt say Help following the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellula
201. hich is colorless and odorless Inspection e When working near the radiator cooling fan turn the ignition key to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time when the ignition key is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low the preceding safety tips 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Coolant Checks Coolant protection checks should be made every 12 months prior to the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the cooling system hoses for brittle rubber crack ing tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill At the intervals shown in the appropriate maintenance schedule the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the solut
202. hing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost m
203. hone and Network Status Indicators The UConnect system will provide notification to inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status has low signal strength or has a low battery when you are trying to place a phone call Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the
204. icle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag in the unlikely event that a rear facing infant seat is in the front passenger seat NOTE Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indica tor lamp illuminates the words PASS AIRBAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags 81321cb8 This light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat In this case the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs The PAD Indica tor Light is also turned off when the seat is empty The only time that the PAD Indicator Light is turned on is when a small weight is in the front passenger seat The system is required to turn on the PAD Indicator Light when the weight in the front passenger seat is close to a rear facing infant seat Relatively light objects like brief cases and grocery bags will also turn on the PAD 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Indicator Light The PAD Indicator Light will be off when teenagers most children and most children in forward facing seats are in the front passenger seat The system is only r
205. ife Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before 258 STARTING AND OPERATING driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you Front Rear Axle have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within Axle the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Empty Weight 2054 Ibs 1805 lbs Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect 932 kg 819 kg on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way Load Including driver pass 271 Ibs 579 Ibs the brakes operate sengers and cargo 123 kg 263 kg A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that Total 2325 lbs 2384 Ibs neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been 1055 kg 1081 kg exceeded GAWR 2546 lbs 2708 Ibs 1155 kg 1228 kg GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING GVWR 2177 KG 4800 LBS NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label attached Example Only to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR GAWRs This table is only an example 812cb8da STARTING AND OPERATING 259 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonabl
206. ime after the stop the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e anda slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals STARTING AND OPERATING 227 All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steeri
207. in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in Wash ington DC area or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 357 NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working
208. ines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 202 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Operating the engine with the oil levels below the safe zone or operating with oil levels that exceed the top of the safe zone by 25 may cause engine damage Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following list to see if any apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 e Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 Trailer towing e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Off Road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protec
209. ing beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to section Add Names to Your UCon nect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return t
210. ing by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 265 WARNING NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for
211. ion is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type CAUTION e Mixing of coolants other than the specified HOAT coolant may result in decreased corrosion protec tion and engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty If a non HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 Adding Coolant When adding coolant or refilling the system a minimum of 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water should be used Higher concentrations not to exceed 70 are required if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the wa
212. ions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior 300 300 Touring Bulb Number Low Beam 9006 High Beam 9005 Front Park Turn Lamp 3757AK Front Inner Park 194NA Front Outer Park 194NA Front Fog Lamp If Equipped 9145 10 Serviced at Dealer Front Sidemarker W5W Serviced at Dealer Tail Stop Turn Lamp 3057 Rear Sidemarker 168 Backup Lamp ues ce Rc 3057 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED License ee Xp EPIS 168 LIGHT BULBS Exterior 300C Bulb Number Low Beam Headlamp Standard Halogen 9006XS Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge HID 015 Serviced at Dealer High Beam 9005 Front Park Turn Lamp 3157AK Front Fog Lamp 9145 H10 Serviced at Dealer Front Sidemarker W5W Serviced at Dealer Tail Stop etc 3057 Tail teer Dok ein 24 bank 3057 Turn Signal Lamp s kie keen 3057 Backup Lamp 3 5239 ese 3057 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED LICENSE eap E HE Pha E Rr pd i REA
213. irection of the air by rotating the right mode knob to one of the following positions e Defrost 9 Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Defrost Floor Qe Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats e Bi Level 2 Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Air flows through the regis ters in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Depress this button to turn on and off the air conditioning during manual operation only Con ditioned outside air is then directed through the outlets selected on the mode control dial The button includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation is selected and will cause an audib
214. isassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor etc will withdraw any slack in the belt 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These device
215. istics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 one year old and weigh at least 9 kg 20 Ibs Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the actly when installing an infant or child restraint vehicle Convertible child seats ofte
216. it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Child
217. itive 107
218. ivated by repeating this procedure To lock the doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash once to acknowledge the lock signal The horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on and off by referring to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual or by following these steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 4 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To unlock the trunk Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk NOTE The transmitter can be programmed to unlatch the trunk by pressing the trunk button only one time by performing the following procedure 1 Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmit ter 2 Continue to hold the Unlock button wait at least 4 but no longer than 10 seconds then press the trunk button 3 Release both buttons Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and
219. iving more than 50 miles 80 km before replacing tire and wheel e This tire is designed as an emergency spare only do not exceed 50 MPH 80 km h speed WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273 Wheel Cover Installation If Required 3 Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the VALVE VALVE two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to STEM NOTCH install the cover 4 Return to Changing a Tire Section Item 9 above JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS LOW WARNING Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever MOUNTING di TUD COVER LUG NUT the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan 80ea6062 1 Tighten the two lug nuts on the mounting studs on each side of the stud which is in alignment with the valve stem 2 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel 274 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure care fully Battery fluid is a cor
220. izer light located on the instrument panel below the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center buttons will flash and the vehicle will not start If the alarm is triggered and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after three minutes and after 15 minutes of light only operation the system will then rearm itself To arm the system Remove the key from the ignition switch and either 1 Press a power door lock switch while the driver s or passenger s door is open 2 Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmit ter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the system will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Theft Alarm Immobilizer light will flash If it does not illuminate the system is not arming If you open a door during this arming period the system will cancel the arming process You must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences to rearm the system To disarm the system Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter Also using a valid sentry key and moving the ignition switch to the ON START posi tion will disarm the system If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the system Check the vehicle for tampering E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the keyless entry transmitter cannot
221. k out outside odors smoke and dust Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped The Infrared Dual Zone Climate Control System auto matically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger This is accomplished by a dual sun sensor in the top of the instrument panel and an infrared sensor located in the face of the control unit There are also various sensors monitored by this system which take account for vehicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature The infrared sensor independently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passenger Based on the sensor input the system automatically adjusts the air flow temperature the air flow volume and amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions 8135020a Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the right mode knob to AUTO and place the blower control left knob to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO
222. ke System WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu conditions The system automatically pumps the ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent can it increase braking or steering efficiency be wheel lock up yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brak d ti the traction afforded The electronic brake force distribution EBD prevents the dece Mei c dM rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop amp 3 The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys tem The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four s
223. ked externally powered electric engine block heater available vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may from your dealer is recommended cause serious injury or death The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear 208 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Un burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting proce dures and follow them carefully Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the NORMAL STARTING procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage
224. l the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Next move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 8125e159 Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 LIGHTS Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn the light OFF The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 8125e174 Overhead Console NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is
225. l Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are A B and C and they represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con crete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade is based on braking straight ahead traction tests and does not include cornering turning performance YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 359 WARNING The temperature grade is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A highest B and C repre senting the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustain
226. laced immediately Continued operation could result in failure of the univer sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors trunk and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film 302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to rem
227. languages will reset the system delete temporarily override phone priorities Select a language English or Espanol System will reset and proper All Phones Deleted language will be set Pairing Complete Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 8131b2a7 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system is used to help drivers determine if an obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside mirrors When the driver selects Reverse or Neutral the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear bumper Objects can be detected from up to 71 inches 180 cm A warning display above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings indicating the range of the object WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury or death The display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs that can be viewed from the driver seat using the rear view mirror Each side of the vehicle has its own warning LEDs The system provides a visual warning by illumi nating o
228. le This button can also be used to return to a previous navigation menu selection When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Memory 1 2 Profile Set Memory 1 2 Profile Recall Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not In Park with a single chime Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Door 5 with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Adjustable Pedals Disabled Cruise Engaged with a single chime only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats Adjustable Pedals Disabled Vehicle In Reverse with a single chime only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats Channel 1 2 OR 3 Transmit Channel 1 2 OR 3 Training Channel 1 2
229. le beep NOTE To manually control the air conditioning the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illuminate and an audible beep indicates that the rear window defroster is 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME ON The defroster automatically turns off after approxi mately 10 minutes of operation for the first push of the button and will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second push of the button CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The button includes an LED that illuminates and an audible beep indicates that the recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately 5 NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculate icon button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and ham per visibility For this reason the system will
230. leased To program your transmitters perform the following 1 Insert the key into the ignition and turn the key to the Run position 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Press and release the Set 5 button on the memory seat switch then press and release button 1 or 2 Memory Profile Set 1or 2 will be displayed in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center 4 Press and release the Lock button on the transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your transmitters may be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the Unlock button on the transmitter in step 4 above On vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center Optional these functions can be selected at the EVIC using the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center Personal Set tings for details When newly purchased or replace ment transmitters are programmed into the vehicle the first transmitter trained will be associated with memory A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 setting 1 and the second transmitter trained will be associated with memory setting 2 Additional transmit ters will not be associated with a memory setting Driver s Seat Glide Exit Feature If Equipped This feature provides ease of entry and exit for the driver by moving the driver s seat approximately 2 1 8 inches 55mm rearward on
231. least 2 minutes at or above 15 mph 24 km h CHECK TPM SYSTEM See your authorized dealer when this message appears in the EVIC This message indicates that a system fault condition has been detected es STARTING AND OPERATING 247 CAUTION The TPM system has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPM system pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sen sor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPM system as damage to the sensors may result CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor NOTE e The TPM system can inform the driver of a low tire pressure condition e The TPM system is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPM system should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure mm General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmf
232. ll begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection SCAN Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD FEJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloade
233. ll display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Turning the tune knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broad cast PTY information Turn the tune knob to select the following format types Program Type 16 No program e or pec None News News Information Information Sports Sports Talk Talk Rock Rock Classic Rock Classic Rock Adult Hits Adult Hits Soft Rock Soft Rock Top 40 Top 40 Country Country Oldies Oldies Soft Soft Nostalgia Nostalgia Jazz Jazz Classical Classical Rhythm and Blues Rhythm and Blues Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft amp B Foreign Language Foreign Language Religious Mu
234. lular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When prompted say the phone name of the cellular phone you wish to use or say List Phones to hear a list of all the phones that have been paired to your UConnect system To select a phone from the list press the Voice Recognition button and say Select A lower priority phone will only be used for the next phone call After that the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete You will be asked to say the name of the phone that you wish to delete You can either say the name of the phone that you wish to delete or you can say to delete all the phones Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Recognition VR Always wait for the beep before speaking Spe
235. m provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer
236. mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up 260 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are recommended for motoring safety The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE For vehicles equipped with Autostick By using the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 CONDI TRAILER FRONTAL AREA NOT TO TION
237. n Center equipped vehicles appears in the instrument cluster es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN WARNING Unlock the steering column by pulling out the handle located directly below the column To tilt the column Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The move the steering wheel up or down as desired To telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv lengthen or shorten the steering column pull out or push ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or in the steering wheel Lock the steering column in driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle position by pushing the handle in until it fully engages POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is lo cated below the multi function lever on the steering column To tilt the column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired Steering Column Handle 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN NOTE Note If your vehicle is equipped with the memory seat feature your remote keyless entry transmit ter or memory buttons on the driver s door panel can be Moving the steering column while the vehicle is used to recall the steering column tilt and telescopic moving is dangerous Withou
238. n communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
239. n die from suffocation or heat stroke E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front A airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if so equipped left and right side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows ina darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on th
240. n have a higher A rearward facing child restraint should only be weight limit in the rearward facing direction than used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing straint in the front seat may be struck by a by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are deploying passenger airbag which may cause se less than one year old Both types of child restraints are vere or fatal injury to the infant held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System section Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in Before buying any restraint system make sure that it the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag Standards We also recommend that you make sure deployment could cause severe injury or death to that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle infants in this position where you will use it before you buy it 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly
241. n list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious to provide prompt resolution for any warranty issue or related matter that you may experience The manufactur er s dealers have the facilities factory trained techni cians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner The manufacturer has empowered its dealers to make warranty and repair decisions that ensure you are not inconvenienced There is no need for you to wait for a decision from the manufacturer If a special circumstance occurs that requires information from the manufacturer we have asked the dealer s service management to make the contact on your behalf EN YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 353 This is why
242. n pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 239 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity mm WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When two or more tread wear indicators appear in adjacent grooves the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to yo
243. nchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces ln addition there are tether strap anchorages behind ea
244. nd indicator will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidently set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed pull the lever toward you and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE Speed control will only function in third fourth or fifth gear when in the Autostick Mode if equipped NOTE The speed control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the lever away from you CANCEL or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory Pushing and releasing the lever ON OFF or turning off the ignition erases the speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the lever up and release ACC RES Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set speed can be increased by pushing the lever up and holding ACC RES When the lever is released a new set speed will be established Pushing the lever up and releasing ACC RES once will result in a 1 mph
245. ndow omm The rotary knob on the left controls the defroster and the heated side mirrors if L e blower and can be set in one of four equipped An LED in the button will illuminate to speeds and OFF The blower fan mo indicate the rear window defroster is ON The defroster tor will remain on until the system is automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of opera turned to the OFF position or the tion 1241942 ignition is turned OFF E Temperature Control CAUTION The temperature of air can be selected by rotating the temperature control knob in the center The coldest tem perature setting is on the extreme left and the warmest setting on the ex treme right of the rotation The knob can be positioned at any point on the To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window 812d193c Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water dial 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Mode Selection 3 The mode selector the right rotary z knob can be placed in several posi Wis tions Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the occupants to fine tune sid Airflow distribution 3 Defrost 9 Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door wi
246. ndows through the side window demister grilles NOTE To improve fuel economy leave in defrost only when necessary Defrost Floor Pe Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Bi Level Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to partially block airflow 1 7 3 Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Recirculation The recirculation feature can be selected with the mode control knob You may choose between Bi Level Recirculation and Panel Recirculation air outlets while in this mode Normally air enters from outside the vehicle How ever when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 is re used Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily bloc
247. nds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature This feature can be turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If equipped Refer to Headlamps On With Wipers in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for details Daytime Running Lights Canada Only The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal night time driving Lights on Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for 90 seconds programmable when leaving your ve hicle in an unlighted area es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 To activate the delay feature turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The 90 second delay inter val begins when headlight switch is turned off If the headlights or park lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned on the delay will be cancelled If the headlights are turned off before the ignition they
248. ne or more yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer to the object As the vehicle continues to approaches the object one red LED is illuminated and the system emits a series of short beeps The tone will remain constant and both red LEDs are illuminated once the vehicle is within 12 inches 30 5 cm of the object es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 NOTE The Rear Park Assist System displays the outer most yellow LED s at a slightly dimmer level to indicate that the system is ON NOTE When an audio tone is indicated by the Rear Park Assist display the system will MUTE the radio if it is turned on The system can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC when the vehicle is in PARK Refer to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for details NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system If Service Park Assist System appears in the EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer SEATS Power Seats The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward Power Seat S
249. ng a stuck vehicle by moving be tween First and R Reverse do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages STARTING AND OPERATING 213 NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 64 8 km of driving Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is considered a normal condition Pulling the shift lever into the 3 position will show that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This is considered a normal condition and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque convert
250. ng assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolong operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur 228 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE Vv oe DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY gt 4 AND STANDARDS T CENA TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LI Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have t
251. nger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING If you are required to drive with the trunk open new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breat
252. ngine Wait approximately 10 seconds A Cc N Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three times Follow the reset procedure described in the previ ous section In Permanent Limp Home Mode PARK P REVERSE R and NEUTRAL N will continue to operate SECOND gear will operate in the DRIVE D shifter position The malfunction indicator lamp may illuminate STARTING AND OPERATING 219 Automatic Transmission General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon CAUTION e Altitude Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Driving Style e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the Accelerator position mm vehicle has come to
253. nt x eR bea 299 Reminder Seat Belt 35 Remote Keyless Entry 20 Remote Sound System Controls 190 Remote Trunk Release 28 Replacement Tires 241 Reporting Safety Defects 356 Restraint Head 96 Restraints Occupant 29 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 277 Rotation Wires exse kee Re ke ERE 249 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle en INDEX 371 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 59 Safety Defects Reporting 356 Safety Information Tire 228 Safety Tips sais om EST e eed a 58 Satellite 2252 2 es dee Yd xus Ed SORES 187 Satellite Radio Antenna 189 Schedule Maintenance 336 Seat Belt Maintenance 314 Seat Belt Reminder 35 Seat Belts 30 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 34 And Pregnant Women 36 Child Restraint er 50 55 Extender 42 229 cb eas desea E RS 36 Front S at 3 ipsu ke ob eh 31 Operating Instructions 31 Reminder 4 05 edi See ee hee Y 145 Seals hee be Sa dag 89 Glide I Exit silber e 95 Heated s RR 92 Lumbar Support 91 POWER Gao KR
254. nt airbag 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the airbag control module detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and right front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 e the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irrita
255. nt heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow Air Filter If Equipped The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in your Owner s Manual for filter replacement instructions 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Tips T ae control for comfort WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS 27 and turn on Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle A t set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows O Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel __ or Bi Level 63 with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny
256. ntil the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will be dis played Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from t
257. nual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual AW 2 TURN SIGNALS REAR WINDOW WIPER WINDSHIELD WIPER INTERMITTENT ERAKE SYSTEM Em PN PARKING d FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM e en at e gt FUEL FILL SIDE WINDSHIELD WASHER REAR WINDOW FLUID LEVEL SEAT BELT ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW WINDSHI
258. o couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services or immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes
259. o minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery The top of the MAINTENANCE FREE battery is perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required 208 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in WARNING the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can NOTE The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that bum or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid should not be disconnected and should only be replaced to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean with a battery of the same type vented over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Batt
260. o the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the ent
261. oad ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear SELF SEALING TIRES IF EQUIPPED A non hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0 19 in 5 mm to minimize the loss of air pressure This contributes to the safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED TIRE PRESSURE MONITORI
262. ode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately E Mirrors UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped Tilt In Reverse Feature If Equipped Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Outside Mirror Driver s Side Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Power Remote Control Mirrors Heated Remote C
263. of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground B of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the Jump Starting engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 276 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger ous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up b
264. om the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and 4 move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner NOTE RND Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped R
265. ompact Spare Tire COMPASS eese HE Eder Compass Calibration 364 INDEX Compass Variance 151 Computer Trip Travel 149 Console aT EIS dee d e 130 Console Floor 130 Console Overhead 118 Contract Service 354 Coolant Pressure Cap 305 Cooling System 303 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 305 Coolant Capacity 332 Coolant Level 306 Disposal of Used Coolant 306 Drain Flush and Refill 304 Inspection esses Rr REDE ERE a 303 Points to Remember 306 Pressure Cap sus 305 Radiator 305 Selection of Coolant 304 332 333 Crise Control tuna ced 115 Cup Holder sse 129 315 Customer Assistance 352 Data Recorder Event 48 Dealer Service 289 Defroster Rear Window 195 Defroster Windshield 59 196 201 Delay Wipers exe Ree RES ng 108 Diagnostic System Onboard 287 Dimmer Switch Headlight 106 Disposal Antifreeze 306 Door Ge deste m 15 Door Locks Automatic
266. on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289 If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the us
267. on for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME MUTE Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player LOAD Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and
268. one or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal The selector lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the selector lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selec tor lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position es STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Stopping For brief stops leave the transmission in gear and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal For longer stops with the engine idling shift into the NEUTRAL or PARK position and hold the vehicle with the parking brake When stopping the vehicle uphill do not hold it with the accelerator use the brake This avoids unnecessary trans mission heat build up Maneuvering To maneuver in tight areas control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes Accelerate gently and never abruptly step on the accelerator To rock a vehicle out of soft ground mud or snow alternately shift from forward to reverse while applying only slight acceleration Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunc tion indicator light to come on Turn off the engine and restart the engine to
269. ontrol Mirrors It Equipped R3 67 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 68 lll Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped i42 n 68 Operations eet Cae Eun ces 70 Phone Call Features 75 UConnect System Features 77 Advanced Phone Connectivity 81 Things You Should Know About Your UGonne ct Systetm i uses o Pe eR Rer 82 H Rear Park Assist System If Equipped 88 62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE W Seats coa Ro RAN Pr 89 Power sd 0 iets e b x ek eno 89 Power Reclining Seats 90 Lumbar Support 91 Heated Seats If Equipped 92 Memory Feature If Equipped 93 Programming The Remote Keyless Transmitter For The Memory Feature 94 Driver s Seat Glide To Exit Feature It Equipped xs ese Ru eee 95 Head Restraints icis e Rh 96 Folding Rear 97 Bl Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 98 To Open And Close The Hood 99 a Lishis 101 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 101 Interior 101 Headlight Switch 102 Multi Function
270. opened The interior lights will automatically turn off 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position if they are switched on manually or if a door is left open to protect the battery This includes the glove box but not the trunk Turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the switchable lamp that was left on to restore the interior light operation Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlamp switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the in strument panel lights 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center if equipped and radio when the parking lights or head lights are on Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of
271. operating speed and condi tions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacture en STARTING AND OPERATING 249 NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the 5 designation on the tire side wall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons
272. or remote keyless entry transmitter The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC if equipped section of this manual for details For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Auto Unlock The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Auto Unlock feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped section of this manual THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto 3 Depress the power do
273. or unlock switch to unlock the Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing doors the following procedure 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the PEN 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition programming 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and NOTE Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position features in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To activate the system open the rear door and move the child lock control located near the door s rear latch to the ON position When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 23 feet 7 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE If the key is in the ignition
274. ory feature switch is located on the driver s door panel The memory switch allows the driver to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Memory Switch To Set The Memory Feature 1 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedal if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped settings as well as the radio presets 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 Press and release the Set 5 button on the memory seat switch then press button 1 within 5 seconds The radio display will show which memory position is being set 3 A second memory profile can also be stored in the vehicle memory Begin by pressing 2 on the memory switch for driver 2 Adjust settings to desired positions press Set S button then press button 2 within 5 seconds Each time the Set and a numbered button are pressed the old memory is erased and a new one is stored NOTE Memory positions can be set without the ve hicle in Park but the vehicle must be in Park to recall a memory position The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature must be turned on using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in this manual for details Programming the Remote Keyless Transmitter for the Memory Feature Your remote transmitter can be programmed to return to a memory profile when the Unlock button is pressed and re
275. ove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and oper ate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates iin 8125e17d Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303 Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust Cooling System system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO w
276. p is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders 300 Perform the following steps to clean the center console cup holders e Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cup holder firmly and lift upward to remove e Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris e Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth Carefully tuck the front followed by the rear then side edges of the cup holder into the center console Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders 300C 300 Touring Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cup holder in the center console NOTE The 300 Touring and 300C cup holde
277. prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 10 seconds If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds NO DISCS LOADED will be dis played es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE For CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activ
278. r longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink buttons 8125e19b HomeLink Buttons WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand held trans mitter buttons Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming section 4 The EVIC display will show Channel X Training where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Release both buttons after the EVIC display shows Channel X Trained NOTE If the EVIC display shows Did Not Train repeat steps 2 4 5 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink
279. r Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone re fer to Introduction section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have NOTE www chrysler com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71 Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process The UConnect system will then prompt you to begin the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular phone Before attempting to pair phone please see your cellular phone s user manual Bluetooth section for instructions on how to complete this step For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
280. r cannot be removed Power Distribution Centers Front Power Distribution Center A power distribution center is located in the engine compartment This center contains fuses and relays 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Front Power Distribution Center Fuses Cavity Fuse Circuits e When installing the Power Distribution Center 1 20 Amp Left High Beam Headlight cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Yellow erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so 2 20Amp Right High Beam Headlight may allow water to get into the Power Distribu Yellow tion Center and possibly result in a electrical 3 15Amp Adjustable Pedal system failure Dk Blue When replacing a blown fuse it is important to 4 20 Amp Horn use only a fuse having the correct amperage Yellow rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than 5 25 Amp Headlamp Washer If indicated may result in a dangerous electrical Clear Equipped system overload If a properly rated fuse contin 6 15 Amp Front Control Module FCM ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit Dk Blue that must be corrected 7 20 Amp Fog Lamp Yellow 8 15 Amp Park Lamp Dk Blue 9 15 Amp Non ABS Brakes Dk Blue 10 5 Amp Starter Orange MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 Cavity Fuse Circuits Cavity Fuse Circuits 11 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Powertrain 20 20 Starter Dk Blue Control Module
281. r filter X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt X and tensioner Replace if required Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve 1 Replace the power steering fluid X Change the automatic transmission fluid and X filter Replace the air conditioning filter X Rotate the tires X X X M A N T E N A N C S C H U L S 8 344 SCHEDULE B Mmm Miles 75 000 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 120 000 125 000 130 000 134 000 139 000 144 000 Ng Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X em quired Replace the air cleaner filter X E Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X ME Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Check and replace if necessary the PCV X HEP valve t EE Replace the air conditioning filter X X RE Rotate the tires X X X SCHEDULE 345 Miles Kilometers 93 000 149 000 96 000 154 000 99 000 158 000 100 000 160 000 102 000 163 000 105 000 168 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter
282. r the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc LOAD LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode MSG or INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the FF side of the bu
283. r your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Voice Confirmation Prompts are also customer program mable through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If Equipped Refer to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for details P
284. re and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure Brakes In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses t
285. red Replace the air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Replace the air conditioning filter X X X Rotate the tires X X X X X X M A N T E N A N C E S C H D U L E S 8 l N T E N A N C H E U L E S 8 348 SCHEDULE A Miles 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 72 000 Kilometers 67 000 77 000 86 000 96 000 106 000 115 000 Months 42 48 54 60 66 72 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X required Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt X and tensioner Replace if required Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months X or 102 000 miles Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve n y y y Replace the air conditioning filter X X X Rotate the tires X X X X X X en SCHEDULE A 349 Miles 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 100 000 102 000 Kilometers 125 000 134 000 144 000 154 000 160 000 163 000 Months 78 84 90 96 102 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter
286. ren Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CH ildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether a
287. results in maximum BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking power during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure WARNING BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated The yellow BAS malfunction indicator light comes on with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the BAS malfunction indicator light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the BAS or the ESP system If this light stays illuminated have the BAS and ESP checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible BAS The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS on some models The yellow BAS malfunction indicator light
288. ring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine off and cold the coolant level should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle Some darkening of the coolant bottle will occur over time This is normal When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill See your authorized dealer to properly fill the cooling system Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulat ing on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check coolant freeze point in the system e If frequent coolant
289. riv er s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button Press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button when in this display until DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS appears to make your selection Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock Available with Memory Seat Only When ON is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the remote keyless entry Unlock button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the door mounted switch Press and release the 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature Press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
290. rmal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297 WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately T
291. roduct How Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this service be performed by dealers or other service facilities time using recovery and recycling equipment 300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE NOTE Air Conditioning systems found to be contaminated with A C System Sealers Stop Leak Prod ucts Seal Conditioners Compressor Oil or Refrigerants not approved by the manufacturer voids the warranty for the Air Conditioning system A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter indicate this Refer to the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals
292. romptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soa
293. rosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immedi ately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting NOTE The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach and without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position for both vehicles 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275 4 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post A in the engine com partment Connect the other end
294. rt the eraser end of a pencil into the tape drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions Maintain your cassette tape player The head and capstan shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape deposits each time a cassette is played The result of deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap around and become lodged in the tape transport The other adverse condition is low or muddy sound from one or both channels as if the treble tone control were turned all the way down To prevent this you should periodically clean the head with a commercially available WET cleaning cassette As preventive maintenance clean the head about every 30 hours of use If you wait until the head becomes very dirty noticeably poor sound it may not be possible to remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high 194 UNDERSTANDING
295. ry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries e To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you
296. s are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control module see Airbag Section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom
297. s convex mirror Power Remote Control Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Seats section for details Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window Defrost 68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UCon
298. s that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule Change the automatic trans mission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 96 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing gt ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 337 CAUTION e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice e Off road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first At Each Stop for Fuel Once a Month Failure to perform the required maintenance items m
299. se the Treble tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL ANCE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Adult Hits Alert Alert Alert Alert Classical Classical Classic Rock Classic Rock College College Country Country Emergency Test Emergency Test Foreign Language Foreign Language Information Information Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalgia Oldies Oldies Personality Personality Public Public 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME
300. service vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 266 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Preparations For Jacking e Dark the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or Hazard Warning Flasher slippery areas set the parking brake and place the Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the gear selector in PARK Turn OFF the ignition vehicle is being jacked e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267 Jack Location e Remove the fastener securing the spare tire The jack is stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack e Open the trunk e Lift the access cover using the pull strap po 6 812 5587 813449 268 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
301. sic Religious Music Religious Talk Religious Talk Personality Personality Public Public College College Unassigned Weather Weather es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station NOTE If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a PTY seek Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operating Instructions Tape Player Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the left and the mechanical action of the player will gently pull the cassette into the play position NOTE When subjected to extremely cold temperatures the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm up for proper operation Sometimes poor playback may be experienced due to a defective cassette tape Clean and demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year Seek Button Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the tape and down to return to the beginning of the current selection
302. siossa nesa iit 252 Sun Roof d Re E 124 Sunglass Storage eee 118 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 37 Tachometer 141 Telescoping Steering Column 109 Temperature Control Automatic 197 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 143 265 Theft Alarm ccu e Rede eA 24 Theft Systm eee ee a mt eere en 24 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 131 Tilt Steering Column lllesss 109 Tire and Loading Information Placard 232 Tire Identification Number TIN 231 Tire Markings 228 Tire Safety Information 228 sex Rie X e Rope RU eee aed 59 236 358 Air Pressure assa 236 Alignment x2 ue XXE eA 242 CHAINS dcc dosage m eR eee E hd 248 Changing xen em ee nes 265 269 Compact Spare 22 00 n 239 Flat Changing 265 General Information 236 High Speed ek ee cee eee eee es 238 Inflation Pressures 237 JACKING 2e 266 269 Load Capacity 232 233 Pressure Monitor System 243 Quality Grading 356 oiga kegi eR e 239 Replacement 55s see ERE e 241 Rotation ssim x eR E hd 249 en INDEX 373 Safety
303. sition the mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you The mirror will normally be in the AUTO mode unless OFF is pressed on the switch at the base of the mirror A green light in the base of the mirror will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on Inside Day Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Ny NIGHT a B 80975232 Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield 66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped The driver s side outside mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Inside Rearview Mirror Tilt in Reverse Feature If Equipped The Tilt in Reverse feature tilts the outside rearview mirrors down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the RUN position This
304. st and then place the selector in P Park position The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P Park position e When shifting into P Park move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P Park position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 211 CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of P Park you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the shift lever is released Otherwise damage to the shifter could result R Reverse For moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before moving the lever to R Reverse except when rocking the vehicle N Neutral Engine may be started in this range WARNING Do not coast in N Neutral and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle D Overdrive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides smoothest up shifts and down shifts and best fuel economy Select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs when us ing the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly ter rain traveling into strong head winds or while tow ing heavy trailers NOTE If the vehicle is star
305. strument Panel Lens Cleaning 314 Interior Appearance Care 313 Interior Fuses 26 4 0 o o es 315 Interior Lights RI RR 101 Intermittent Wipers 0 0 108 Introduction 1 2 xx d oie nnd s 4 Jack Location ce dha PES 267 Jack Operation ecs iss n 266 269 Jacking Instructions llle 269 Jump Starting cessere ee owes adie Reed 273 Key Programming i eae rene 14 Key Replacement 13 Key Sentry wes ex ee ns eR e oq ces 12 Key In Rem nder lex rex eter 12 Keyless Entry System 20 KEYS bad dx Bane RE gon ie dos 11 Kn Bolster xa RR RR 37 Lap Shoulder Belts sss 30 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren osos re xem 54 Latch Plate i d reps 31 Latches HOO uuum tne ERES RP 99 Lead Free Gasoline 250 Lights sse Eee se ek ias 59 101 Adrbag wawa eva ee e Re RE Anti Lock ee Automatic Headlights Brake Warning Bulb Replacement Courtesy Reading Daytime Running sess 368 INDEX MMM Dimmer Switch Headlight 103 Engine Temperature Warning 141 FOR ieu kem de ese dos abide lod RR ES 105 140 Hazard Warning Flasher 264 Headlight Switch n 103 Headlights ees 10
306. t a stable steering col positions Refer to the Seats section for details umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS IF EQUIPPED WARNING TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The TCS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns or Power Tilt Telescoping Steerin pem hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others The traction control system TCS warning light is located in the instrument cluster The TCS light will flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin This indicates that the TCS system is active If the TCS warning light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions When the TCS warning light is illumi nated continuously the TCS is switched off To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by TCS press the TCS switch the TCS warning light in the instrument cluster goes out Avoid spinning one drive wheel This
307. t the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines MIN OIL MARK MAX OIL MARK 809744ab 2 7L 3 5L Engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291 8131ee6a 5 7L Eng
308. t the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl instruments And Controls 137 Bl Standard Instrument 138 Bl Premium Instrument Cluster 139 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 140 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped esce iei esam 147 Functions mere 149 Compass Display 150 Telephone If Equipped 152 Navigation If Equipped 154 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features H Setting The Analog Clock 158 lll Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability 159 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 159 Operation Instructions CD Mode 162 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone It Equipped see I ket eae es 164 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped 2 2 22 062s RR e 164 134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Sales Code RAQ AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone And Vehicle Entertainment Systems Ves Capabilities s asd Kea eee een BEM 164 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 164 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play 169 Load
309. t the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button active calls will be terminated ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect sys tem Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to LOCK Call continuation functionality can be of three types e After ignition key is switched to LOCK a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After ignition key is switched to LOCK a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to LOCK Vehicles such as Pacifica support this approach UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is usin
310. ted in cold outside tempera tures shifts into Overdrive may be delayed Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate temperature Refer to the Note under Torque Con verter Clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets too hot the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en gage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down After cooldown Overdrive will resume normal operation 212 STARTING AND OPERATING 3 Third This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The trans mission will operate normally in First Second and Third while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selec tions CAUTION e Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These prac tices can cause overheating and damage to the transmission When rocki
311. tem will scan for objects behind the vehicle Press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the U Connect system are confirmed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit Available with Memory Seat Only When ON is selected the driver s seat moves rearward 5 cm 2 inches or to the farthest rearward position if this distance is less than 5 cm 2 inches when the key is removed from the ignition switch so that the driver can more easily exit the vehicle The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the door Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center o
312. ter antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Coolant Pressure Cap The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the coolant bottle from the overflow tank The coolant pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the coolant pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the coolant pressure cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the coolant pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requi
313. ter are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Off or Low heat settings Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs are illumi nated for high one for low and none for off Pressing the switch once will select high level heating Heated Seat Switch Pressing the switch a second time will select low level heating Pressing the switch a third time will shut the heating elements off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 When high temperature heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal high temperature level If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after two hours of continu ous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after two hours NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes Memory Feature lf Equipped This feature allows the driver to store up to two memory profiles Each memory profile will include the seat side mirror adjustable pedal if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped settings as well as radio station presets The mem
314. terior trim but they will open to allow airbag deploy ment 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured be cause the airbags are not there to protect you These protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side curtain airbags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side curtain airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instru ment panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Left and right side curtain air
315. the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 246 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE For vehicles with optional wheel tire sizes and significantly different tire placard pressures the placard pressure value and the low pressure threshold value is re programmable at your authorized dealer to accommo date the customer selected wheel tire combinations rec ommended by DaimlerChrysler The following warnings will cause a text message to be displayed an audible chime to sound and the tire pres sure Indicator Lamp to illuminate The audible chime will occur once every ignition cycle for each warning detected The tire pressure Indicator Lamp will illumi nate continuously solid and shall remain illuminated until the warning condition is removed reset NOTE The Indicator Lamp will only illuminate for the four active road tires A low spare tire pressure will not cause the Indicator Lamp to illuminate When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages LEFT FRONT LEFT REAR RIGHT FRONT RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE One or more of these messages will be displayed in the EVIC if a low tire pressure condition exists in one or more tires Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure once the proper tire pressure has been set the TPM system warning will reset automatically when the vehicle has been driven for at
316. tion Center 318 Vehicle Storage lt s a piu vex ok mm htc tes 321 Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 322 B Pub Replacement ad err E x e x 323 Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Inner Park Lamp And Outer Park 300 323 Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp And Park Turn 300 324 Backup Lamp Side Marker Lamp And Tail Stop Turn Lamp 300 326 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283 Tail Stop Tail Turn Signal Lamp And Backup lll Recommended Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Lamp 300 xe e 329 Parts T 333 331 Enpe 333 Bi Fluids Capacities 332 Chassis 334 284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 7L ENGINE POWER S MEIN ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR COOLANT DISTRIBUTION CENTER 5 FLUID CHECK ACCESS COVER BOTTLE WASHER REMOTE JUMP START ENGINE COOLANT AIR CLEANER POWER STEERING BOTTLE POSITIVE BATTERY POST OIL PRESSURE CAP FILTER FLUID CHECK 8127c8d3 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285 3 5L ENGINE AUTOMATIC BRAKE FLUID COOLANT POWER AIR CLEANER DISTRIBUTION CENTER TRANSMISSION FILTER RESERVOIR PRESSURE FLUID FILL ACCESS COVER CAP REMOTE JUMP START WASHER ENGINE OIL ENGINE COOLANT POWER STEERING POSITIVE BATT
317. tion continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Enhanced Accident Response Feature If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically In addition approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven Side Airbag System The airbag control module determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the airbag to inflate The control module receives the level of collision severity from the side impact sensors The airbag control module will not detect rollover or rear impacts The side impact SRS Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the airbag control module detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbags to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is
318. tion under all types of operating conditions the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 71 Engines Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils that meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Stan dard MS 6395 Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specifi cation MS 6395 81364ec7 2 7L Engines SAE 5W 30 and SAE 5W 20 engine oils are recom mended for all operating temperatures These engine oils improve low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used 204 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 3 5L Engines SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3 5L Engines within the operating temperatures shown in the engine oil viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil is allowed for use in the 3 5L Engine during cold weather only to improve cold weather starting
319. tisfactorily on fuels meeting Federal specification but emission control system performance may be ad versely affected Gasoline sold outside of California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels which may affect the performance of the vehicle s catalytic converter This may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate The manufac turer recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related prior to returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service CAUTION If the Malfunction Indicator light is flash ing immediate service is required Refer to the paragraph on the Onboard Diagnostics C System in section 7 of this manual STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system and could result in loss of warranty coverage e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalyti
320. to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
321. to load than non multisession discs 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 112 96 80 64 e Number of files and folders Loading times will Layer 3 56 48 40 32 24 increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next File Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode For MP3 Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC Afte
322. transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range AutoStick Gear selection The transmission gear can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the right or the left with the selector lever in the DRIVE position The gear currently selected is indicated in the instrument cluster display Briefly press selector lever in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear Shifting into another gear that allows for quicker acceleration or to slow the vehicle down is possible Downshifts can also be performed Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear directly to the best gear for acceleration es STARTING AND OPERATING 217 NOTE To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever is moved in D direction the transmis sion will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s revolu tions per minute limit would be exceeded Briefly press the selector lever in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear directly to gear D WARNING On slippery road
323. tton to move forward through the MP3 selection TUNE Control CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 AM FM Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode For Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE RAK AM FM CASSETTE CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE VIDEO MP3 and WMA CAPABILITIES 81322436 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition
324. ture Warning Light E This light illuminates and will be accompanied M by a single chime to warn of an overheated engine condition The engine temperature is critically hot and the vehicle should be turned off immediately The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible 9 Anti Lock Brake Light S This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 10 Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light If Equipped The yellow Brake Assist System BAS mal function indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the BAS malfunction indicator light comes on continu ously with the engine running a malfunction has been detect
325. u ment panel for 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition is first turned on then turns the light off If it detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the light either momentarily or continuously WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away When the airbag control module detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the airbags Three levels of airbag inflation rates are possible These rates are determined by the airbag control module based on collision severity The airbag covers separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 60 milliseconds This is only about half of the time it takes you to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through a vent hole in the rear of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and position you for the best interaction with the fro
326. ual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually To put into a Calibration Mode Turn on the ignition switch Press and hold the compass button for approxi mately 2 seconds Use the SCROLL buttons until Cali brate Compass is highlighted Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will appear in the EVIC Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To set the variance Turn the ignition switch ON Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 sec onds Use the SCROLL buttons until Compass Variance is highlighted The Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number will be displayed Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map Pr
327. ul interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration 248 STARTING AND OPERATING The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States sisse RR rz KR55S120123 Canadas De stesso 2671 5120123 TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as pos sible and then retighten after driving about 2 mile 0 8 km e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not use on rear wheels of All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation
328. ur spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control 240 STARTING AND OPERATING Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount Tire Spinning conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section on the vehicle at any given time 6 of this manual CAUTION WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced VG a I S These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear in 2 or more adjacent groo
329. using the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Delay Turning Headlamps Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlamps remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Headlamps On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in this section Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When ON is selected the system senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 when in this display until ON or OFF appears to
330. vate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will be displayed Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits have been displayed The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will b
331. ve coatings from your vehicle finish The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation CAUTION e Stone and gravel impact Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Special Care Washing e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve od a month hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e Itis important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu open lated on your vehicle wash it as soon as possible e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains and to polish your vehicle Take care never to scratch the paint ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is consi
332. ve the screws securing the light to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly and pull the bulb from the socket MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 804DbIc7 3 Replace the bulb and reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 4 Reattach the light to the rear fascia 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES Cooling System 24 Liter Engines Mopar 9 5qts 9 0 liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 3 5 Liter Engines Mopar 10 3 qts 9 75 Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year liters 100 000 Mile Formula 5 7 Liter Engines Mopar 14 0 qts 13 3 Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year liters 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to level U S Metric Fuel approximate 2 7 Liter Engines 87 Octane 18 gal 68 liters lons 3 5 Liter Engines 89 Octane 18 gal 68 liters lons 5 7 Liter Engines 89 Octane 19 gal 71 liters lons Engine Oil With Filter 2 7 Liter Engines SAE 5W 30 6 0 qts 5 7 liters API Certified 3 5 Liter Engines SAE 10W 30 6 0 qts 5 7 liters API Certified 5 7 Liter Engines SAE 5W 20 7 0 qts 6 6 liters API Certified ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or
333. ves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition switch a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only occurs when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC positions SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle This system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic chip transponder embedded into them Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be armed or activated Operation of the system is automatic regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or unlocked During normal operation the Theft Alarm Immobilizer Light will come on for three 3 seconds immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb check Afterwards if the bulb remains on this indicates a problem with the electronics E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check this indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the vehicle Both of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2
334. ves the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance charac teristics resulting in changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with l
335. witch 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Power Reclining Seats The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Power Seat Recline Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support Control Lever 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Seats lf Equipped Heated seats which are available only with leather upholstery provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The front driver s and passenger seats are heated The controls for each hea
336. x jus ete MA E 109 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 119 Programming Homelink 119 Wi Traction Control System Tes If Equipped 110 Canadian Programming Gate Programming 122 Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 112 Electronic Stability Program ESP Using Homelink kac epe 123 lt Bquipped swear each 113 Erasing Homelink Buttons 123 Synchronizing ESP 115 Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button 123 64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iuge Pa de ARD don Ea 124 W Cupholders 129 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 124 Front Seat Cupholders 129 Express Open Feature 125 Rear Seat Cupholders 130 Wind ocs xu hpc Ea 126 ade ues 130 Sunroof 126 Console Features 130 ll Electrical Power Outlets 127 Cargo Tie Down Hooks 131 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 128 W Load Leveling System If Equipped 132 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65 MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped If the switch is in the AUTO po
337. y be used by DaimlerChrysler and THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permis sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be dis closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match dat
338. y can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK butt
339. y do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the main tenance schedules manual When your vehicle is used for trailer towing never exceed the gross axle weight rating GAWR by the addition of e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Warranty Requirements The Manufacturer s Passenger Vehicle Warranty will apply to vehicles used to tow trailers for non commercial use However the following conditions must be met e The maximum frontal area of the trailer cannot exceed 32 square feet 2 97 square meters e The trailer tongue load must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual e The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range must be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor
340. ystem 243 Parts ee 289 356 Multi Function Control Lever 103 New Vehicle Break In Period 57 Occupant Classification System 45 Occupant Restraints 29 Octane Rating Gasoline 250 Oil s ea ood ba Ro e a 290 333 Capacity sereis ua eae dee Ee 332 Change Interval 292 Che cking sace DRE E REP IEEE 290 291 Disposal ee ee eR eR hers 294 Fiir audasuqadadex as ada x RE 295 333 Filter Disposal i26 ea 294 Identification Logo 293 Materials Added to 294 Recommendation 292 332 Synthetic ics ERE Lace 294 MISCOSIDY oed eee een 293 294 332 Onboard Diagnostic System 287 288 Opener Garage Door 119 Operator Manuals 4 Overhead Console 118 Overhead Travel Information Center 118 Overheating Engine 144 264 Owner s Manual 4 356 Panic Alarm asc GER OS EY ns Parking Parking On Hill 5 22 n Passing Light seresa Pedals Adjustable Personal Settings Pets idees RR etx Gee RUE SEDES Phone Cellular bre ERR Phone Hands Free 68 Placard Tire and Loading Information

Chrysler 2005 300 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents